Home

ZyXEL Communications metrogigabit switch Plumbing Product User Manual

1. 1 Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 1 1 the default IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 47 for more information MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 3 Click Basic Setting gt IP Setup in the navigation panel 4 Configure the related fields in the I P Setup screen 5 For the VLAN2 network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask In the VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen Click Add to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off IP Setup Domain Name Server Default Management in band Management IP Address Out of band Management IP Address band IP Addresses IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Index IP Address 0 0 0 0 in band C Outofband C DHCP Client Static IP Address IP Address 5216811 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway opo VID Il IP Address 216801 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway
2. 55 Chapter 5 initial Setup EMAC 57 EARE OMEN P Ce 57 cape cui Eie c er e P 57 Sae a PO VIE iina RH Marva Ua Ed ren Obs NU d E 58 5 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address esses enne 60 Chapter 6 Hu KHE O O AY 63 8 1 How to Use DH GOP Snooping On Tie GIMEOIY diae cone Corso ttti Io E tees tutta nadia 63 6 2 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Swileh 1 5 eese eesk eec ienar emnt tnun nun ken kae ennaii a 67 6 2 1 DACP Relay Tutorial InIEOOBOllgl seaccsissiascss aunaicgtntssscocees Peeditede estu a obaper lege eet aM ERAS 67 Rowe ITE mL E cT 68 Ga COON DHCP ela saisai annaa Dio abc data arsi adea Eze 71 024 TROUIIS cds 72 B3 How muse PPPOETA bn hie SWIBEI iunio o rer BR AN N RR 72 SEC Eun e FEE I ET tO o a a 73 Gaa COPING ies im quse 15 6 4 How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch sesssessssssseee 78 Bo Font Sa Upa Guesi VLAN T 80 Go t Oraino a E EY qu VLAN cruati TRITT 81 6 5 2 Enabling IEEE 802 1 Port Authentication soisssrossirsnniurisviouuinn niinniin 83 Goa Enabling Guest VLAN e Eia EE EO 84 12 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Table of Contents 6 6 How To Do Port Ios IRE YLAN assasssusiosetissixk bres nti Pu RD ERR era c nr Pr anta triads 85 BI CODD E VL
3. HOOO 341 KNEE as cea aeals ened ie a ac o a Vai easan AOA ra 341 35 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior usoocutuuisuasidk aoa Fas rau e RA E Ead ua ubi 341 2B 12 ere Nebvark EXalpli sarine brine pum iren Ser tage e Fee ERARE 342 36 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing sese 342 255 7 TRTOBI GOIOE DOR MOGE 2ieiiatisbadekkiac ndi dseatibnrd aa taken uus dcn aaa Gb ada Rid 343 30 22 TRTCM Color aware o e 344 aS AGAR GI en err erba dada ad oce Lad can S ne eb d eb Mr PAP EH 344 36 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings sesssssseee 346 304 DSCP to IEEE 892 1 Priority SOT NIS aesccicuesetseesdeseusc tae paete unu Eee a C enun iar 347 25 5 1 Canioning DCP OUS 1iccenngia reni Eres aue Ebr dax id Fab etam a Esa ada 348 Chapter 37 DHC P M M Y n 349 CKMETIEMS I T 349 crAMEEL EID o M T 349 acd 2 DHOP Gong OPONE sennie ebe e Viddubbe cu Res oe Md NOR ba qid oubbe Ul qi DER 349 37a DHCP coi a m 350 SOP Ge DAOP PRN ae IUNII T 350 Bio DHCP Relay Agent Mormaii uxccccxxcuie brevi anet etc ted sa peneu cuta Peevi aue le udaa E Perd liae des 350 87 22 Dan dguring DHCP Global RBI 1c poisk erc hana ipte d e ak br pt ard E an 351 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Table of Contents 37 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configu
4. MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 47 Product Specifications Table 150 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2460 IPv6 Specification RFC 2461 Neighbor Discovery for IPv6 RFC 2462 IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration RFC 2463 ICMPv6 ICMP for IPv6 RFC 2698 Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2674 P BRIDGE MIB Q BRIDGE MIB RFC 3046 DHCP Relay RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management CFM IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance IEEE 802 3x Flow Control Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A
5. c VLAN Stacking J Port based QinQ Selective QinQ Active O Port Role Tunnel TPID Normal 1 Normal poo 2 Normal Ii Bio 3 Normal m B 4 Normal M Bi o 5 Normal E B 6 Normal poo 7 Normal bd o o 8 Normal i Bin 9 Normal m Bi o 10 Normal Y B T Normal poo 12 Normal S 8100 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 63 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Role Select Normal to have the switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVI D and Priority of the Port based QinQ or the Selective QinQ screen are ignored Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tu
6. eeeeeeeeee 429 Appendix A Common SO VICES since bi eld e SERT RUM eS eai 431 Appendix B Legal normalo Meet 435 NUON 439 22 MGS3700 12C User s Guide PART Introduction and Hardware Getting to Know Your Switch 25 Hardware Installation and Connection 31 Hardware Overview 35 Tutorials 63 v3 91 AAFX 0 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction The MGS3700 12C is a layer 2 stand alone Gigabit Ethernet GbE switch The Switch has 12 GbE dual personality interfaces with each interface comprising one mini GBIC slot and one 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 port with either port or slot active at a time With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments See Chapter 47 on page 419 for a full list of software features available on the Switch 1 1 1 Backbone Application The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch s port or connect other
7. in vie oO OLDEST Port Active Hn 1 Iv 2 Iv 3 Iv 4 iv 5 v 6 Iv 7 v 8 Iv g v SIS 4 Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority BPDU Control d auo A Tr oz Pe monom fato A joz Peer z 1o00 ato A tS oz Peer z m0000 ato A r or Peer z 000m auo A oz Peer z m0000 ato vx Lr oz Peer z dotooionM Auto A or Peer donowtoM ato A Lr oz Peer m0000 auo A Lr or Peer z mooom Auto v Fr or Pe gt m0000 auo x Lr oz Peer monom fato A or Peer z donor Ato A Lr or Peer J Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limita
8. RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client authentication the Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 25 2 AAA Screens The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication authorization accounting or all of them on the Switch First configure your authentication and accounting server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority activate authorization and configure accounting settings MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Click Advanced Application gt AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 124 Advanced Application gt AAA x RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here AAA Setup Click Here 25 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 256 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 25 3 on page 265 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the authentication and accounting features on the Switch Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 125 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup RADIUS Server Setup AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority gt Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared
9. MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 47 Product Specifications 47 1 Fan Module Removal and Installation This section describes how to change a fan module on the Switch The hot swappable fan module is at the left on the Switch s front panel Perform the following procedure to remove the fan module in order to change a fan fuse or the fan module 1 Loosen the thumbscrew on the front of the fan module 2 Slide out the fan module a Replace the fuse if it is burnt out If the fuse is not the problem use a different fan module from the manufacturer 4 Slide the fan module back into the fan module slot 5 Tighten the thumbscrew MGS3700 12C User s Guide 427 Chapter 47 Product Specifications MGS3700 12C User s Guide PART VII Appendices and Index Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site e Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like e Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number e Port s This value depends on
10. e A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority eo The security certificate date is valid A The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed example No View Certificate 39 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 199 Security Certificate 1 Netscape A Website Certified by an Unknown Authority xj Unable to verifyfhe exu Aple b as a trusted site Possible reasonsXor this error p Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due You are connected to a site pretending to Ed Vo Qs possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certific
11. lt lt lt x lt lt lt MGS3700 12C User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 26 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes e MAC address e VLAN ID e IP address e Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features e Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table e DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically e ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 1 1 DHCP Snooping Overvi
12. IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a
13. The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management MGS3700 12C User s Guide 43 1 MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen MAC Table Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table e If the Switch has already learned the port for
14. Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for multicasting on the local network only For example 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts on a local network segment and 224 0 0 9 is used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to other networks See the IANA web site for more information The layer 2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer 2 protocols 01 00 0C CC CC CC and 01 00 0C CC CC CD are also included in this group Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGM
15. VLAN Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Statvip Endvio sd Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No E c Lem v7 P Apply Cancel The settings are completed now If you miss some settings above subscriber C could not successfully receive an IP address assigned by the PPPoE Server If this happens make sure you follow the steps exactly in this tutorial MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 4 How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch This tutorial shows you how to shut down a port when e there is a loop occurred or e too many ARP requests over 100 packets per second received on a port You also want the Switch to wait for a period 10 minutes before resuming the port automatically after the problem s are gone Loop guard and Errdiable features are helpful for this demand Note Refer to Section 27 2 on page 297 and Section 31 3 on page 312 for more information about Loop Guard and Errdiable To configure the settings First click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Select the Active option in the first section to enable loop guard on the Switch Then select the Active option of the first entry port to enable loop guard for all ports Click Apply ED Loop Guard Active Port Active OO NO Tif WO NY e VIIIIIIWII SII I N Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Click Advanced Applicat
16. 169 14 1 Bandwidih Control OVervieW oausdceisasiquudu pube Sitat ebur rt imd EG tait tan sea E M Rd 169 ise r i fte 169 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Table of Contents tie Banowidih i Gonral G0 T cem 170 Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Gonlen a a aa aaa a n 173 15 1 Broadcast oem Control Settlp rutisee RAE 173 Chapter 16 Ve PE E E E A 175 16 3 Part Mirono SEUD ain a e aba ra edt T 175 ji PRE I EET I PNE IE 177 js IESUS I2 Me 177 1642 PVF SXDIYIQUESIIOE sito iranin n boca ae ad aes 178 Jit MOINS T qo ET 179 ys aeri R 181 152 Eon USO PON siccae ais a nde ab obudUL oaa dae DOUG ciu C Gu oodd Eua lu Gu eR odd 183 Chapter 17 Link AggrogaliOUi 1uisiasxiazis inan knkl tj Ax Rua RRXRRREERR AE XMARARAR EAE ARIRUAREMR EAR R AKEREEAE DR XERRS UR RAMAR AA AR ENEISERE 185 DEREN Aggregation LIVER OW MT 185 pre sbcDI MN Xie i I D 185 TOR LIB aCe WILY oaicsotusiat titt tu d date dott Ped E tn D nep Por R CUR EI diens 186 DESEE FRSA SAUS riiin i EE US 187 jr dE Nose e asisas ei m 189 17 5 Link Aggregation Genel Protocol aisi uicier toc qisdueb reru eaoe cuv didis bxeh n dado Fab qdddbb tes uii ddobes 191 DEP ECCUIEIU DIIS UTNE ER DE E LI 192 Chapter 18 i4 j 195 18 1 Part Authenibstion COORG sinisiraan i e uada bet Ui dab bs 195 19 1 1 IEEE 902 1 LTD
17. HTTP ICMP specified trusted computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide 387 Chapter 39 Access Control 388 MGS3700 12C User s Guide This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 40 1 Diagnostic Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 204 Management gt Diagnostic Diagnostic System Log IP Ping Ethernet Port Test Resolving 192 166 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful 192 168 1 23 z Display Clear IP Address Ping Port 1 Port Test MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 40 Diagnostic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 136 Management gt Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order
18. Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 54 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Numbers ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 In the Internet Protocol there is a field called Protocol to identify the next level protocol The following table shows some common protocol types and the corresponding protocol number Refer to http www iana org assignments protocol numbers for a complete list Table 55 Common IP Protocol Types and Protocol Numbers PROTOCOL TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER ICMP 1 TCP 6 UDP 17 EGP 8 L2TP 115 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Some of the most common TCP and UDP port numbers are Table 56 Common TCP and UDP Port Numbers PROTOCOL NAME TCP UDP PORT NUMBER FTP 21 Telnet 23 SMTP 25 DNS 53 HTTP 80
19. Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 47 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Req Specify the number of times the Switch tries to authenticate client s before sending unresponsive ports to the Guest VLAN This is set to 2 by default That is the Switch attempts to authenticate a client twice If the client does not respond to the first authentication request the Switch tries again If the client still does not respond to the second request the Switch sends the client to the Guest VLAN The client needs to send a new request to be authenticated by the Switch again Reauth Specify whether a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauth period Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connect
20. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Destination LABEL DESCRIPTION RMirror VLAN Select a RMirror VLAN ID that you configured in the RMirror screen from the drop down list box Monitor Port Enter a port number to create a monitor port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the VLAN ID Monitor Port This field displays the monitor port number Tagging This field displays the traffic form monitor port is tagged with RMirror VLAN or not Delete Select Delete RMirror VLAN and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring 16 2 5 Connected Port The connected port is the physical port connected to other switch in the same RMirror VLAN and it can t be Mirror port or Monitor Port Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Connected Port on the up right of the navigation panel to display the screen shown See the Table 41 on page 184 for more inf
21. LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 69 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and
22. Table 79 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y NAS Identifier Y Y Y NAS IP Address Y Y Y Service Type Y Y Y Calling Station Id Y Y Y Acct Status Type Y Y Y Acct Delay Time Y Y Y MGS3700 12C User s Guide 267 Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 2 3 Table 79 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP Acct Session Id Y Y Y Acct Authentic Y Y Y Acct Session Time Y Y Acct Terminate Cause Y Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 80 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via 802 1x ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y lt NAS IP Address NAS Port Class Called Station Id Calling Station Id NAS Identifier NAS Port Type Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session Id Acct Authentic lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Acct Input Octets Acct Output Octets Acct Session Time Acct Input Packets Acct Output Packets lt lt lt x x lt x lt xi x Acct Terminate Cause Acct Input Gigawords lt Acct Output Gigawords lt lt lt x x lt
23. The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes The Port Setup screen allows you to configure settings for each port such as port activation speed and duplex flow control 802 1p priority and BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units control MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System I nfo to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch s temperature fan speed and voltage in this screen Figure 41 Basic Setting gt System Info System Name MGS3700 12C ZyNOS F W Version V3 91 AAFX 0 10 16 2012 Ethernet Address 50 67 f0 3a 2d 3e Power Source Status Power Source Mode AC Prefer AC Power Absent DC Power Absent BPS Absent Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C Ly Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status BOARD 41 0 44 0 31 0 85 0 Normal MAC 45 0 48 0 33 0 100 0 Normal PHY 47 0 50 0 34 0 100 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 6257 12826 6157 500 Norm
24. AI Ethernet Type C Others Hex Layer 2 Any E MAC Address 6 sel ME ee Any Port Destinat yaapa 0 estination cme C if sf Sf sf es C Any DSCP ar Al v 7 establish only IP Protocol C Others Dec i IP Address 0 0 0 0 EN Layer 3 i Address Prefix Source G Any Socket Number oC IP Address goo 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix G Any c Destination Socket Number Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Packet Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 Format untagged Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet II untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 standards A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet II encapsulation 212 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 52 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided When VLAN mapping is enabled this
25. Click Management gt Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 190 Management gt Access Control ED Access Control SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here MGS3700 12C User s Guide 367 Chapter 39 Access Control 39 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 191 SNMP Management Model Manager Al Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object va
26. Contents Overview Inir duction and Hardware corcosson a naaa a 23 Gamo to now TOHE SWG aa iiaa E T E 25 Hardware Installation and Connection ccc cccccccescccccsccssecicadssseaauinatsteosanenainersennnsncensnasiesneaninarens 31 Du EE c EE E Uu I EE 35 Th VE PECON T Loader EORR RR Neto GER MER RUD RE AS FERE E ber dU rr creer rere tery 47 Hual enp ERIM em e A 57 PI eec Hr 63 Basio Configuratio BR 91 ovsieim Status and Port SIS audiat celeste Sede srt an pos niaaa eta enue NAA 93 Ea RICE MPO TIENE ETT DT T DET TTE D 99 Poe VANICOG RUM 115 SEES ous pedalis ie dal ea ta aan pafl e o d ten LS tU pc MC HP T M nce EO Ra D an 117 SE MAC ris i c Apu erect 137 suae Mullib3st Forward SEUD euissieddc bane etin ha Mercede rd n ext pe Eabb od AMD MIR 141 aE E EE E tob Rito ebbe m Eau bd tst n bete dre E emt an E RNEbu bm futu tmm ERE 145 Spaning TeS PIO GOD Ree aaa 147 EDO E DEB isup iE RU ado nx edendo tun dut as aU Ax eom D ERE XD UOCE R EUR USE FORE QU NEUE 169 Eirogdosst Stonn DONE ssepe tii eet i ise ira oie ao EID d OMEN dU Eau tte mds di 173 EPOD dupbenntkeneaudee m parametri E d dte UI pe rap du iasU ee d Mei Ku Rid ru Nace 175 Bi Ree PET DIDI S UI UL TIT 185 Port PSPC AIO ST EET o D E 195 m 203 gib che TUE 205 SEO MEI E IT 211 re AU m aT DET sdunaecandaodtecias R 219 wr p ie
27. In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Figure 207 Clustering Application Example 42 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager Figure 208 Management gt Cluster Management Status Vianagement Status Clusteri Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 Configuration The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 Status Online MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 141 Management gt Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The of Member following fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyp
28. Inner Tag Priority Select Trust Untrust inner tag priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 4 2 Selective Q in Q Selective Q in Q is VLAN based It allows the Switch to add different outer VLAN tags to the incoming frames received on one port according to their inner VLAN tags Note Selective Q in Q rules are only applied to single tagged frames received on the access ports If the incoming frames are untagged or single tagged but received on a tunnel port or cannot match any selective Q in Q rules the Switch applies the port based Q in Q rules to them Click Selective QinQ in the Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 110 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ Xn mun NND VLAN Stacking Active Name Port CVID SPVID E Priority Ada Cancel Index Active Name Port CVID SPVID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ LABEL DE
29. gt Login local Authorization Type Active Method Exec O radius Dot1x O radius Accounting Update Period p minutes Type Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege System E O radius gt Exec E m start stop gt radius X Dotlx m O start stop radius Commands r O stop only tacacs D J Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands See the CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access
30. when the maximum number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast forwarding table entry is aged out Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new IGMP report s received on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Sa
31. POP3 110 See Appendix A on page 431 for information on commonly used port numbers 20 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy in the Policy screen to define action s on the classified traffic flow Figure 102 Classifier Example t Classifier Active Vv Packet Format All VLAN Priority Ethernet Type Layer 2 Destination DSCP IP Protocol Layer 3 Source Destination Name Exemple X G Any C G Any c o e all j MAC Address Any macho f0 pe e far ien Any Port MAC Address Any me o D cf ost G Any o e At j Establish Only others Dec IP Address joo 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix G Any Socket Number IP Address ooo L Address Prefix pene Any Socket Number c Add Cancel Clear MGS3700 12C User s Guide 217 Chapter 20 Classifier MGS3700 12C User s Guide 21 1 21 1 1 21 1 2 Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 20 on page 211 for more information A policy rule
32. restart the Switch Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory each time you make changes Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently See also Section 38 3 on page 360 for more information about how to save your configuration Save Status O Logout B Help MGS3700 12C User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 147 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions Standard 19 rack mountable 438 mm W x 225 mm D x 44 2 mm H Weight 3 6 Kg Power Specification One Backup Power Supply BPS connector AC 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz AC version only DC 48 VDC DC version only AC DC dual input 100 240 VAC 50 60Hz from 36 VDC to 72 VDC Note There is no tolerance for the DC input voltage Power Consumption 38 W maximum Interfaces All Models 12 GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each interface has one 1000Base T RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP slot with one port active at a time One local management 100Base T RJ 45 port Auto negotiation Auto MDIX One console port Compliant with IEEE 802 3ad u x Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x LEDs Per switch BPS PWR SYS ALM Per 1000BASE T RJ 45 port slot 100 1000 LNK ACT Per mi
33. 38 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure A c Launch the FTP client on your computer Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch Press ENTER when prompted for a username Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 123 on page 364 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 38 8 3 GUl based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID
34. A VLAN Active Name VLAN ID Promiscuous Ports PrivateVLAN123 123 5 Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name VLAN Promiscuous Ports Delete Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently From port 2 3 or 4 you should be able to access the device that attachs to port 5 such as a server or default gateway MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials MGS3700 12C User s Guide PART II Basic Configuration System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 7 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 39 Status OLED Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKBis RxKB s Up Time 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Z Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
35. Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Na
36. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the VLAN ID 802 1p Priority This field displays the 802 1p priority Mirror Port This field displays the mirror port number s Ingress This field displays the ingress direction port number s of mirror port Egress This field displays the egress direction port number s of mirror port Both This field displays the both direction port number s of mirror port Reflector Port This field displays the reflector port 16 2 4 Destination It will monitor port traffic from intermediate switch or source switch by RMirror VLAN The configuration contains RMirror VLAN monitor port and connected port If the destination switch is other supplier switch device it needs to support 802 1q for basis function on RMirror If user wants to have fully support on RMirror learning should be disabled and forwarding the control packet Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Destination on the up right of the navigation panel to display the screen shown See the Table 40 on page 182 for more information on Destination switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Destination Destination 4 RMirror Rmirror VLAN 500 v Monitor Port 2 Tagging Apply Cancel VLAN Monitor Port Tagging Delete 500 2 Untagged Delete Cancel
37. Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Table 51 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Port This field displays the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID This is the VLAN ID number to which the port belongs Limit Number This is the maximum number of MAC addresses which a port can learn in a VLAN Alarm Alarm threshold of learned MAC address by VLAN Threshold Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security MGS3700 12C User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch 20 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equ
38. Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packet to priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Action C Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packetto the egress port Metering Enable Iv Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action SetOut Drop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule MGS3700 12C User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 22 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 22 1 1 Strictly Priority Queuing Strictly Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only As traffic
39. Flooding Y 11 4000 200 0 Deny v Defaut v Auto v Flooding v 12 4000 200 0 Deny v Default Auto Y Flooding Y Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast hosts attached MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 67 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups
40. J eat Je J et I eco 0 00 00 e o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q o o o0 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 8 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port TxBytes This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxBytes This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port HOL This field shows the number of pack
41. Mt 195 y wies Une CE 196 15 28 Port Authentication COMODO ecce iati per etae Por deae aa aani 197 1941 AGES IEEE SUP IX BOUE aussen icant 198 j RETE FN emo m 199 18 2 3 Activate MAC Authentication iuis etre eott tree ccu pe enia piter pnec on dul ends peru 202 M 203 Chapter 19 Lc a a o E a m 205 TI Apo POM SSCI sirean a aaa 205 Tee Fan Seth ete A A Moon a d Rei ap b 206 19 3 VLAN MAC Address LIMIN asrsimosu inisiasi aia RR aR 208 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 15 Table of Contents Chapter 20 loli Pm ns nn nr Pe PE a ee ee TPE er ee er reer ee eee 211 20 1 ABOUT Tie CAGES and DoS Aet 211 20 2 OMIM TRE ARSS cicicedccccanutascubends 211 20 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration essssssssssssseeeeeeee enne 214 20 5 Clee eh EXAITIBIS coisisoi c heidberind d e PARE Ctea did acti edi uda MebbesinduLaceda edu becu dUdb ter aes 216 Chapter 21 xu m 219 fle Pele lbs WANEN ronronis dert aput od ebria boo tp pou a t n a hob poda 219 AREE PAP rep T S 219 2T 2 DSGP and Par Ho Belgio soe eee Epheso Er Po en aa inte dor onde uctus 219 ZLA Coniounng Paley Bo ce OUT 220 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration scaireanna 223 Es FORY EOT E a A a 224 Chapter 22 Queu Method a a R Oe se epee ee A aA Eaa 227 22 1 Queuing DISCO E 227 22 1
42. Probe Packet A B a The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 145 Loop Guard Network Loop Note After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 8 7 on page 112 or via commands See the CLI Reference Guide 27 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Note The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 146 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Loop Guard Active O Port Active O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 r 6 O 7 O 8 r 9 O 10 E 11 E 12 r Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide 297
43. This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 1518 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1519 octets in length and the maximum frame size The maximum frame size varies depending on your switch model See Chapter 47 on page 419 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 8 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information
44. click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 136 ARP Inspection Status ARP Inspection Status VLAN Status Log Status Configure IPSG Total number of filters 0 Index Mac Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete a O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of filters This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter Mac Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 87 ARP Inspection Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table IP The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID an
45. click a number in the Index field Figure 104 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table index Active 1 Yes Name Classifier s Delete Test Example E Delete Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule 21 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 20 4 on page 216 Figure 105 Policy Example Active Name Classifier s General Metering Bandwidth fi 000 Kbps Out of Profile Egress Port 1 DSCP i E3 Priority joz DSCP Tos joz Forwarding Parameters No change
46. comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 22 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight portion the number you configure in the Weight field when there is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on Guaranteed quantum is calculated as Queue Weight x 2048 bytes MGS3700 12C User s Guide 227 Chapter 22 Queuing Method 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount
47. configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen e 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 23 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 61 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Dat FCS Untagged Etype a Ethernet frame DA SA TPI Priorit VI Len Dat FCS IEEE 802 19 D y D Etype a customer tagged frame D SA Tunne Priori VI TPI Priorit VI Len Dat FCS Double A I TPID ty D D y D Etype a tagged frame MGS3700 12C User s Guide 233 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 62 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Length and type of Ethernet Etype frame Tunnel Tag Protocol IDentifier added on a Data Frame data TPID tunnel port VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence 23 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Note You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time Figure 108 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking
48. contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 39 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MIBs e SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 e RFC 1157 SNMP vi e RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs e RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs e RFC 1155 SMI e RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c e RFC 1757 RMON e SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control 39 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID Table 126 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 Nw HG O This trap is sent when the fan speed goes above or below the normal operating range FanSpeedEventClear 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 N Ww NO This trap is sent when the fan speed returns to the normal operating range temperature T
49. gt Port Figure 140 ARP Inspection Port Configure E ARP Inspection Port Configure Configure Port Trusted State Limit Rate pps Burst interval seconds Untrusted C 7 1 Untrusted 5 n 2 Untrusted is i 3 Untrusted is i 4 Untrusted 1s Eo 5 Untrusted is e 5 Untrusted 5 i 7 Untrusted is i 8 Untrusted is i 3 Untrusted z 5 p 10 Untrusted 5 m 11 Untrusted is e 12 Untrusted is i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit These settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter O to disable t
50. memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the VLAN ID Active This field displays the RMirror Delete To delete a RMirror VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 16 2 3 Source It will mirror port traffic to intermediate switch or destination switch by RMirror VLAN In different scenario of source switch the configuration is different Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Source on the up right of the navigation panel to display the screen shown See the Table 39 on page 180 for more information on Source switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide 1 79 Chapter 16 Mirroring Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Source Rmirror VLAN 500 v Reflector Port 4 802 1p Priority 0v Port Mirrored Direction Ingress Y Ingress Y v Ingress Y IS Ingress Y Ingress Ingress Y Ingress v Ingress Y Ingress v Oo Oo nN DO amp Why Ingress Y ab e Ingress Y Ingress Y h Ingress Y Apply Cancel VIAN Mirror Port Reflector i Ingress Egress Both Port 2
51. s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 2 1 When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that e You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking e LACP only works on full duplex links e All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 42 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PORT PORT PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PRIORITY NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 43 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PORT E MAC ADDRESS KEY acia PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 3 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggrega
52. same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number x Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP Timeout packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are d
53. sensor s documentation to identify its two signal output pins 2 Connect these two wires to any one of the following pairs of signal input pins on the Switch s Signal connector 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The pin numbers run from the right side of the connector to the left 2a Connect each of the sensor s two signal output wires to the Signal connector by depressing the spring clip corresponding to the pin you are connecting to 2b Insert the wire and release the spring clip 2c Repeat the process for the sensor s other signal output wire A total of four sensors may be connected to the Signal connector in this way using the remaining signal input pins MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Door Open Sensor Signal Connector Insert the alarm connector into the Signal slot Figure 14 Connecting a Sensor to the Signal Slot Spring Clip nananana A E WU SSS S 00000000000 Signal Input Pins Signal Dry contact Output normal open only Pins 4 To connect an output device repeat the previous steps but this time connect to either pins 1 2 or 2 3 on the Signal connector You can also daisy chain the external alarm to another ZyXEL Switch which supports the external alarm feature If daisy chaining to a ZyXEL switch that is a different model check your switch s documentation for the correct pin assignments U
54. viewing 437 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 117 changing the password 52 CIR Committed Information Rate 169 Cisco Discovery Protocol see CDP CIST 152 Class of Service CoS 341 classifier 211 214 and QoS 211 editing 214 example 216 overview 211 setup 211 214 viewing 214 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 395 and switch passwords 401 cluster manager 395 400 cluster member 395 401 cluster member firmware upgrade 398 network example 396 setup 400 specification 395 status 396 switch models 395 VID 401 web configurator 397 cluster manager 395 cluster member 395 Committed Information Rate CIR 169 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 152 configuration 339 change running config 361 configuration file 53 backup 363 restore 53 362 saving 360 configuration saving 52 console port 36 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 435 CPU management port 133 CPU protection overview 311 current date 103 current time 103 D daylight saving time 103 DC power status 101 default Ethernet settings 37 default IP address 39 DHCP 349 configuration options 349 modes 349 relay agent 349 relay example 354 setup 353 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 349 DHCP relay 67 DHCP relay option 82 271 DHCP snooping 63 269 270 configuring 271 DHCP relay option 82 271 trusted ports 270 untrusted ports 270 DHCP snooping database 270 diagnostics 389 Ethernet port test 3
55. 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRoutePathChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 1 This trap is sent when path to target has changed from a previously determined path traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed Table 130 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 3 This trap is sent when the 2 2 1 MRSTP root switch changes MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 1 This trap is sent when the MSTP 07 70 1 root switch changes STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 3 This trap is sent when the 2 2 2 MRSTP topology changes MSTPTopologyChange 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 1 This trap is sent when the MSTP 1 07 70 2 root switch changes MGS3700 12C User s Guide 373 Chapter 39 Access Control Table 130 SNMP Switch Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION mactable MacTa
56. 1 5 1 3 1 5 2 Use only power wires of the required diameter for connecting the Switch to a power supply AC Power Connection Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket of your Switch Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet DC Power Connection The Switch uses a single ETB series terminal block plug with four pins which allows you to connect up to two separate power supplies If one power supply fails the system can operate on the remaining power supply Use two wires to connect to a single terminal pair one wire for the positive terminal and one wire for the negative terminal Note The current rating of the power wires must be greater than 20 Amps The power supply to which the Switch connects must have a built in circuit breaker or switch to toggle the power Note When installing the power wire push it wire firmly into the terminal as deep as possible and make sure that no exposed bare wire can be seen or touched Exposed power wire is dangerous Use extreme care when connecting a DC power source to the device To connect a power supply Use a screwdriver to loosen the terminal block captive screws Connect one end of a power wire to the Switch s RTN return pin and tighten the captive screw Connect the other end of the power wire to the positive terminal on the power supply Connect one end of a power wire to the Switch s 48V input pin and tighten the captive screw Conn
57. 1 Siren Priority QUSHING 2 des cepasties rona soo aeee eae aT Aan EEA EEEE 227 2212 Med Far DUET inona kuia aa Aea 227 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR sssseseeeeees 228 ZEE TODO ERE ETTO S 2d demasiada ds Ht Dre Eb a en B og a rte 229 Chapter 23 Rd Rc cipoee 231 23 1 VLAN tC COVEIVIGN sisctetecivddbier m didbietorddp rea teiosber qua ibas dido sd eM turpudiabber aceon 231 23 1 1 VLAN Slacking Example soneria e ea ocio ase Pocos pera 231 Be VLAN SACKING Pon ROES sroka aa a Fa 232 Eau VEN Teu PRSE a a 233 eME AR ETE AE AOA AAA A apnd d a RE 233 23 d anne VLAN SAORA sirisser uenia aana aaae kaaa a a 234 234 1 Port based O DA soiset aoii ied a eee tines 235 ex AE E EDE e Nm 237 Chapter 24 L f inn eins 239 mE T ecuPSCY LCMETR OS SO 0 S10 0E TEM 239 eT P ITN eS AFER iusso paco RR PES Kee ORE Re VERE nate Abe E REA SKEPDUDRE KS A 239 2o T 2 IOMP FRIEUN aipiaiama Gano Rod hu a Rack pe rear Fd aia 239 2A ia WANA cire e 240 240 4 GMP Shopping and VLANG i ipd ota t Y pO a pecca abc ga dota bd 240 ea TCR eT Sie iestuistre uid leti DEMON UE d MI ded Niue Mti ae det meis ecu EN 240 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Table of Contents Z2 MUBS SOUT pdrcanatpxppupnep a PA Me AA eg btc pnt ns 241 2a IBP Se UN EAE aasien a ai a fami Rasen nO ai edid 244 pL EMI bn dec 246 DLBMPEH OVELIIBUN andi erba eodd ioa rb Hin de EM
58. 17 1 on page 185 for more information on link aggregation Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting OES Setting g Status LACP Group ID T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Active Criteria Dn src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac Dinmimsu a D A Group None None None None None None v None None OOM NEM MN amp wens None a None None MN None AAEE Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Setting Aggregation This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 45 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk By default the Switch uses the src dst mac distribution type If the Switch is behind a router the packet s d
59. 175 176 mounting brackets 33 MRSTP status 161 MST ID 152 MST Instance See MSTI 152 MST region 151 MSTI 152 MSTP 147 150 bridge ID 167 configuration 163 configuration digest 167 forwarding delay 164 Hello Time 167 hello time 164 Max Age 167 max age 164 max hops 164 path cost 165 port priority 165 revision level 164 status 166 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 104 multicast 239 802 1 priority 241 and IGMP 239 IGMP throttling 243 IP addresses 239 overview 239 setup 241 multicast group 246 multicast VLAN 251 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 149 Multiple RSTP 149 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 147 150 Multiple STP 150 MVR 247 configuration 249 group configuration 251 network example 247 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 247 N network applications 25 network management system NMS 368 NTP RFC 1305 103 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index P PAGP 306 password 52 administrator 378 Peak Information Rate PIR 169 PHB Per Hop Behavior 342 ping test connection 390 PIR Peak Information Rate 169 policy 221 224 and classifier 221 and DiffServ 219 configuration 221 example 224 overview 219 rules 219 220 viewing 223 policy configuration 224 Port Aggregation Protocol see PAgP port authentication 195 and RADIUS 256 257 IEEE802 1x 198 259 MAC authentication 195 port based VLAN type 106 port cloning 409 410 advanced settings 409 410 basic settings 409 410 port details 96 port is
60. 3 to a guest VLAN 200 for example before they can authenticate with the authentication server In this guest VLAN clients can surf the Internet through the default gateway attached to port 10 but are not allowed to access other network resources such as the mail server or local data base Guest VLAN 200 Ports 1 2 3 and 10 Internet A MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 5 1 Creating a Guest VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 1 2 3 and 10 as a member of VLAN 200 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Switch Setup aD 8021Q ll ase C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active DH MAC Address Learning Aging Time 00 seconds Join Timer po milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer poo milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 z level 6 levels 5 level4 4 level3 3 level2 1 level joz level 2B Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 200 for example in the Name field and enter 200 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure ports 1 2 3 and 10 to be permanent members of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX T
61. 5 v 128 4 6 O x 128 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 73 on page 157 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide 155 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 s
62. ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations e The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings e The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 26 1 2 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 41 on page 391 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 26 1 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch 1 Configure DHCP snooping See Section 26 1 1 4 on page 271 Note It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table 2 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second 26 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns MGS3700 12C User s Guide 273 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrator
63. Access vont General Setup Static Multicast Forwarding puce God Switch Setup Enenng e Management IP Setup Spanning Tree Protocol MAC Table Port Setup Bandwidth Control ARP Table Broadcast Storm Control Configure Clone Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast AAA IP Source Guard Loop Guard VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling sFlow Errdisable PPPoE Private VLAN Green Ethernet MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 4 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for individual Switch ports Advanc
64. Advanced Application Application menus should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 45 Configure Clone MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 45 Configure Clone MGS3700 12C User s Guide PART VI Troubleshooting amp pecifications Troubleshooting 415 Product Specifications 419 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories e Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e Switch Access and Login e Switch Configuration 46 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Switch does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch 4 If the problem continues contact the vendor The ALM LED is on 1 Disconnect and re connect the
65. Age second Forwarding Delay second Cost to Bridge Port ID Configuration Name Revision Number Configuration Digest Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change Instance Instance 0 MSTI 1 Bridge Bridge ID Internal Cost Port ID Spanning Tree Protocol Status Root 0000 000000000000 0 0 0 0x0000 A31 Regional Root 0000 000000000000 0 0x0000 Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Our Bridge 8000 000000000000 2 20 15 0 0x0000 001349000002 0 7523DB32DA2D62 0 0 VLAN 1 4093 Our Bridge 8001 000000000000 0 0x0000 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch Delay second CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits se
66. All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 6 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same
67. Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device ca
68. DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source po
69. GR MIS NE terre Ms 247 za dE Tops MEE POI actenus Quite Dn p tI tee age a iie Eta tete D pcd TRU ER 248 24 0 2 i o e 248 coa me AHON BIE PCN cT Eo TE EET 248 24 7 General MYR DORIISIOON uunscciaddteetis ctee eb oHd di ubere aa Ub ddl Eet adden de 249 25 NNR Group GODIIOBEAHOD suievtcen Das i d ertt edad bbc ed ben a UR DR Pr Rad 251 24 8 1 MYR Configuration EXSITIpIG asocia zeiten onda Fd didi aa dx SURE Eoi aec ia 253 Chapter 25 rr 255 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA ssseeeeeene 255 5 13 Local User PCS oiu auti accu assa curie b bL e o ach Ea tone uL L a bera cu iu adu Leia eeu 0d 256 25 2 LICRINZE UIN TE eco pem 256 Pe pr Poo Jg e ce 256 BG 2 RADIUS Sever elu ossiedicxeidebsdnden necnduecf exta tui aD Red agp se Ea 257 2522 TAGAUS T GOIVOr SEI sonore aii deed ede 259 ERE AD BIB pn aba ebat an qe rr ebd DM n te acp RH e 261 25 24 c ualere p mrs ELE 264 25 9 Supported RADIUS AMINDUIES Mee E 265 25 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication sicccctsssienscciuusiseccasidsesesiedduass casouisetssasdudendssaounesteas 266 25 9 2 Aliibutes Used for Accounting aic aucesseessntedeedeendiecsetasaiicsebesedaledsmiabuandudecndaiecaceds 267 Chapter 26 A lj ac aeaa a aaa aaa a EA een ee 269 251 JP Source Guid COUBEVIBE sires aaa anra p SNA ea OE E 269 20 GI DHCP Sie ines VI
70. M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words MGS3700 12C User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device The Switch Computer Notebook computer NL um Server DSLAM Firewall SS EIS Cum RI Buda Ga Gl HN EJ N E n uS ELE ay Nm um uum Telephone Router US E 6 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool e Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids e Do NOT store things on the device e Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device e Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information e For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse e Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place conn
71. O Al g O 5 r Al M m O 6 m Al z r E 7 r Al s O r 8 O Al E O O 9 O 1 n Al r D 10 rj n Al 7 rj Mod c Rc eee Iac NP s cus xxl edd cel p uL a Ga eT 4 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DHCP VLAN as shown Click Apply Figure 28 Tutorial Specify DHCP VLAN ODE Ti Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active Vv DACP C Disable fioo Database Agent URL Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval sno seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials iaht 5 Click the Port link at the top right corner be m EUTENERER 6 The DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen appears Select Trusted in the Server Trusted state field for port 5 because the DHCP server is connected to port 5 Keep ports 6 and 7 Untrusted because they are connected to DHCP clients Click Apply Figure 29 Tutorial Set the DHCP Server Port to Trusted DHCP Snooping Port Configure d Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps 3 Untrusted p 4 Untrusted p 5 D 6 Untrusted Y Dp 7 Untrusted v p Untrusted p ooo Apply Cancel 7 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure gt VLAN show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VID a
72. RADIUS server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 73 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 25 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 256 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 126 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup OEE Setup g AAA Authentication Server Mode index priori
73. Running Last succeeded time None Last failed time None Lastfailed reason No failure recorded Times Total attempts 0 Startup failures 0 Successful transfers 0 Failed transfers 0 Successful reads 0 Failed reads 0 Successful writes Oo Failed writes 0 Database detail Description Status First successful access None Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions 0 Invalid interfaces D Parse failures 0 Expired leases 0 Unsupported vlans 0 Last ignored time None Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans o 0 0 0 0 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 277 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 278 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 280 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and th
74. Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user e Exec Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have different access privilege level assigned via the external server e Dotl1x Allow an IEEE 802 1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID assigned via the external server MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 75 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for authorization of specific types of events RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802 1x authorization Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s e System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disabled e Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH e Dot1x Configure the Switch to
75. Spanning Tree C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree Mode You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 13 1 on page 147 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP OLE aes IT Status Active Bridge Priority 32768 v Hello Time 2 Seconds MAX Age 20 Seconds Forwarding Delay 15 Seconds Port Active Edge Priority Path Cost 4 v 128 4 2 v 128 3 v 128 4 v 128 4
76. Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the 274 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding Figure 131 IP Source Guard Static Binding IP Source Guard Static Binding IPSG MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port T ie Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 IP Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear
77. TA TITRE M The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Advanced Application gt sFlow LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable the sFlow agent on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to allow the Switch to monitor traffic on this port and generate and send sFlow datagram to the specified collector Sample rate Enter a number N from 256 to 65535 The Switch captures every one out of N packets for this port and creates sFlow datagram MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 30 sFlow Table 97 Advanced Application gt sFlow continued LABEL DESCRIPTION poll interval Specify a time interval from 20 to 120 in seconds the Switch waits before sending the sFlow datagram and packet counters for this port to the collector Collector Address
78. TRTCM and bandwidth control 346 and DiffServ 346 color aware mode 344 color blind mode 343 setup 346 trunk group 185 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index trunking 185 423 example 192 trusted ports ARP inspection 273 DHCP snooping 270 PPPoE IA 319 tunnel protocol attribute and RADIUS 265 tutorials 63 DHCP relay 67 DHCP snooping 63 Error Disable 78 PPPoE IA 72 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 343 Type of Service ToS 341 U UDLD 306 UniDirectional Link Detection see UDLD untrusted ports ARP inspection 273 DHCP snooping 270 PPPoE IA 319 user profiles 256 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation 31 ventilation holes 32 VID 117 121 122 233 number of possible VIDs 117 priority frame 117 VID VLAN Identifier 117 VLAN 104 423 acceptable frame type 126 automatic registration 118 ID 117 IGMP snooping 240 ingress filtering 126 introduction 104 number of VLANs 121 port number 122 port settings 125 port based VLAN 132 port based all connected 135 port based isolation 135 port based wizard 135 PVID 126 static VLAN 122 status 121 122 subnet based 126 trunking 119 126 type 106 120 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 104 VLAN ID 110 VLAN mapping 299 activating 300 configuration 301 example 299 overview 299 priority level 299 tagged 299 traffic flow 299 untagged 299 VLAN ID 299 VLAN stacking 231 configuration 234 example 231 port roles 232 235 port based Q in Q 235 pr
79. Table 2 LED Descriptions continued LED COoLOR S TU DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green On The system is on and functioning properly Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On A hardware failure is detected or an alarm from the external alarm is received Off The system is functioning normally LNK ACT The up arrow icon A on each SFP slot indicates the LED status for the slot while the down arrow icon V indicates the LED status for the corresponding Ethernet port Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet network On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down MGMT 10 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 10Mbps Off The port is not connected at 10Mbps or to an Ethernet device 100 Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 100Mbps Off The port is not connected at 100Mbps or to an Ethernet device 3 4 Configuring the Switch You ma
80. Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter MGS3700 12C User s Guide 107 Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitiv
81. User s Guide Chapter 41 Syslog 41 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings Figure 205 Management gt Syslog Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active M Logging type Active Facility System Vv local use 0 j Interface iv local use 0 j Switch Vv local use 0 j AAA iv local use 0 IP iv local use 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 138 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring th
82. a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP server or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 37 1 1 DHCP Modes If there is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer 37 1 2 DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria e Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server e VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP 37 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 177 IP Application gt DHCP Status DHCP Status Global VLAN Relay Status Relay Mode None The following
83. and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Specify the default local directory path Directory 38 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when e FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen e The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance MGS3700 12C User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 39 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different user names and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 124 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five No limit sessions accounts A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi login 39 2 The Access Control Main Screen
84. any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions MGS3700 12C User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likel
85. applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port has the highest priority MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoE Table 109 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a specific port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to be
86. bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 8 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN For example port 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and port 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 a
87. bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go dir
88. considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following e DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data e AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control 39 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group Click Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager Figure 193 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group C Trap Group J SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP v Type Options System coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset timesync intrusionlock loopguard errdisable externalalarm dyinggasp acprefer Interface linkup linkdown autonegoti
89. date then yyyy mm dd appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many Saving Time countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or MGS3700 12C User s Guide UTC GMT 1 Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 10
90. default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the Switch The Switch routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Switch s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the Switch Figure 168 Example of Static Routing Topology R3 Cm R2 1 cn B ee ee l lt l E E b l I m ieee l M LL Ss wW MGS3700 12C User s Guide 337 Chapter 35 Static Route 35 2 Configuring Static Routing Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 169 IP Application gt Static Routing ED Static Routing HN Active Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric r 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F Index Active T Yes Name Example Add Cancel Clear Destination Address Subnet Mask Metric Delete 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 Delete Cancel Gateway Address 182 158 1 2 2 m The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 113 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name
91. discusses port mirroring setup screens 16 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 80 Advanced Application gt Mirroring OL RMirror Active F Monitor Port 4 Port Mirrored Direction ngress v 1 ngress 2 ngress 3 ngress v ngress 5 ngress 6 ngress 7 ngress Y 8 ngress 9 c ngress 10 ngress 11 E ngress v 12 ngress Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide 1 75 Chapter 16 Mirroring 176 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in Port more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Enter the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the po
92. does not use it and Absent when DC power is not available BPS This field displays the status of the backup power system BPS which is connected to the rear panel of the Switch On the Switch is receiving power from the BPS Present the BPS is connected and is able to supply power when the Switch cannot get power from both AC power and DC power Absent the BPS is disconnected or is failed to supply power Hardware Monitor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and Unit reporting if the temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature BOARD MAC and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a RPM sufficiently ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting
93. downlink ports connected to subscribers e If a PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s e The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a VLAN on a port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non vola
94. entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied MGS3700 12C User s Guide 407 Chapter 44 ARP Table 44 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s 408 Figure 214 Management gt ARP Table Index Noi RIE Sed EIOSINE DX P200 cae eet EROS X1 3 2 G2 OO eg Mee OAND IP Address 172 21 0 2 172 21 3 16 172 21 3 18 172 21 3 40 172 21 3 66 172 21 3 90 172 21 3 91 172 21 3 95 172 21 3 120 172 21 3 138 172 21 4 99 172 21 10 11 172 21 100 153 172 21 207 247 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 5 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 100 MAC Address 00 05 5d 04 30 fl 00 05 1c 15 08 71 O0 0b cd 8c 6d ed 00 0c 75 07 41 0d 00 50 8d 47 73
95. example the first octet pair 00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal so 01 00 5e 00 00 0A and 03 00 5e 00 00 27 are valid multicast MAC addresses VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port s within a VLAN group Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here If you don t have a specific target VLAN enter 1 Port Enter the port s where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are forwarded You can enter multiple ports separated by no space comma or hyphen For example enter 3 5 for ports 3 4 and 5 Enter 3 5 7 for ports 3 5 and 7 Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port s MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Table 23 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule wi
96. external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 25 1 2 on page 256 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section MGS3700 12C User s Guide 255 Chapter 25 AAA 25 1 1 25 1 2 25 1 2 on page 256 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers Figure 123 AAA Server Client AAA Server Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 38 on page 359 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 72 RADIUS vs TACACS
97. help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion The following scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Robin WRR and Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ This allows the Switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Bandwidth Control Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Two Rate Three Color Marker Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes allow t
98. here Port This field displays the port number i Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments to each port if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Rate Limit Enter a number from 0 to 256 to specify how many control packets this pkt s port can receive or transmit per second 0 means no rate limit You can configure the action that the Switch takes when the limit is exceeded See Section 31 5 on page 313 for detailed information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 5 Error Disable Detect Configuration Use this screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 158 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect Errdisable Detect eg Errdisable Cause Active Mode inactive port x ARP inactive pot v BPDU inactive port v IGMP inactive pot v I
99. identifier is the host name of the PPPoE intermediate agent and the eth indicates Ethernet Table 106 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Defined in WT 101 SubOpt Length Value Access Space eth Space Slot Port No VLAN Node ID ID Identifier 1 3 e 1 2 1 byte byte byte 1 byte byte byte 4 20 byte byte bytes 32 2 2 Port State Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for the PPPoE intermediate agent This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping or ARP inspection You can also specify the agent sub options circuit ID and remote ID that the Switch adds to PADI and PADR packets from PPPoE clients Trusted ports are connected to PPPoE servers If a PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports e If a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE discovery packets if you enable the PPPoE intermediate agent and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers e If a PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port the Switch adds a
100. is the translated VLAN ID you set in the VLAN Mapping Configure screen If the incoming traffic is tagged and matches a VLAN mapping rule Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in Type hexadecimal value Refer to Table 54 on page 215 for information Source MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in Protocol decimal value Refer to Table 55 on page 215 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type Th
101. of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method 22 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 106 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method Port Method c OXSUETUERLESIII MAN Weight Q0 spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR SPA C WFO WRR sPQ C WFO WRR SPA C WFO C WRR SPQ C WFO C WRR SPQ C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR hn RB B hM b b FP b hn RB B h b b FP b hn RB B hM b b F b hn RB B hM b b F b hn RB B h Fb b Fr b hn RB B hM EF b FPF b hn RB B h Eb b Fr B hn RB B h b b Fr b hn
102. one when BPDUS traverse the region MGS3700 12C User s Guide 151 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters e Name of the MST region e Revision level as the unique number for the MST region e VLAN to MST Instance mapping 13 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances Figure 68 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 2 13 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions 152 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 69 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Ne
103. other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide pu Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 2 VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 9 1 on page 117 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 49 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail C E VLAN Detal J VLAN Status Port Number VID 2 4 6 8 10 12 Elapsed Time Status 1 3 5 rj 9 11 Uu U Uu Uu U U 1 1 56 04 Static Uu U U Uu Uu The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as
104. peat bad 3 PARERE Ma DEL KR BEER ER MA ARR EA TRE AR AR EE yTE R0 TA MAR EKa REF R1 AR 429 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About THS Users Guide 3 Document Conven OMS 5 EA e TE e acca E T m 7 ro 45 9 Tg 11 Part I Introduction and Hardware eeeeeeeeeeee 23 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your SWIGCIN aucun ti tna sa kie Eg n enana iE KM AME AS 25 TODON usce Eo fada ooa Susp basata panne Ga aad du ERR ERR Reap Feste KR Uo ullas ode 25 Pe EC up esu cUm T T 25 posez eene cry T EE 26 1 1 3 High Performance Switching EXSImpla saissetiae 27 1 1 4 EEE 802 10 VLAN Application EXAMmpleS scscccsscisctecntpccecne temic peacanna ar Te IPO SSHBDOIL nan a N e 28 12 Warsan Manage ihe SUME amcenir e aa 28 14 Good Habits Tor Managing the SWIC ea sce cascachacas ceaacsaceesaccentietaccasnnaegacdedbadpadsneniind aiina 29 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection s eeccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneneeesneeeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeaeeess 31 2 1 Installation Scenarios aure ronceer haod re rues ke hon eunian K RR Eun e ae M a a ande aan Eae pe RREKM RP E Raab R ds 31 2 2 Desktop Installation Procedure 1occiiiesse sees ete csi pecu dame c uana Ere cede elM
105. privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your RADIUS server Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your TACACS server Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch Type
106. revert back to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another sFlow Use sFlow to monitor traffic in a network and create reports for network performance analysis and troubleshooting Dying Gasp Dying gasp allows you to monitor unexpected power down or low power of the Switch Error Disable Error Disable allows you to take an action such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets on a port when the Switch detects a pre configured error PPPoE IA PPPoE IA allows the Switch to add more subscriber information to packets for the PPPoE server on a per port basis Private VLAN Private VLAN allows you to block traffic between ports in a VLAN on the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 47 Product Specifications Table 149 Feature Specifications Layer 2 Features Bridging 16K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control Static MAC address forwarding Switching Switching fabric 24 Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 13 K bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet II PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Prot
107. switches from transmitting traffic to each other Note To use smart isolation you should have configured 802 1Q VLAN port isolation or private VLAN and M RSTP on the Switch Smart isolation does not work with MSTP and or port based VLAN MAC Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All
108. sysname show dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h59m20s dhcp snooping 100 7 Total number of bindings 1 6 2 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP server The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP requests 6 2 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction In this example you have configured your DHCP server 192 168 2 3 and want to have it assign a specific IP address say 172 16 1 18 to DHCP client A based on MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials the system name VLAN ID and port number in the DHCP request Client A connects to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 Figure 32 Tutorial DHCP Relay Scenario b DHCP Server 192 168 2 3 VLAN 102 172 16 1 18 6 2 2 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Figure 33 Tutorial Set VLAN Type to 802 1Q xxu aD VLAN Type S 802 10 C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active E MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Time
109. table describes the labels in this screen Table 118 IP Application gt DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Relay Mode This field displays e None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent e Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only e VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s 37 3 DHCP Relay 37 3 1 Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent I nformation This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 f
110. the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers e If the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number e If the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number e Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 151 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC_TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers MGS3700 12C User s Guide Appendix A Common Services Table 151 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC_TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to fin
111. the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports MGS3700 12C User s Guide 275 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 82 IP Source Guard Static Binding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 276 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 132 DHCP Snooping OLS NEN Confiqure IPSG Database Status Description Status Agent URL Write delay timer 300 seconds Abort timer 300 seconds Agent running None Delay timer expiry Not Running Abort timer expiry Not
112. this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port e If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 43 MAC Table e If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 212 MAC Table Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port 43 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 213 Management MAC Table ED MAC table all Static C VID C Port Sort by MAC J e Dynamic to MAC forwarding C Dynamic to MAC filtering Search Transfer Cancel Transfer Type Index MAC Address VID 1 00 00 aa 10 01 73 00 00 68 7c 14 80 00 02 e3 56 16 9d 0 02 e3 57 ea 1c 0 04 80 9b 78 00 D D D e Dd 88 ca af b2 0e 7b e4 17 18 Of bO 80 e7 56 0 aa faa A E E fos Poe S Oy OM NM amp Wh oo oo a Condition C MAC LI kb kb kb kb IL Port 27 28 27 27 27 27 27 27 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic MGS3700 12C Use
113. time Click Basic Setting gt General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 42 Basic Setting gt General Setup General Setup System Name MGS3700 12C Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup Daytime RFC 867 v Time Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Time Sync Interval 1440 minute s Current Time 02 35 55 UTC New Time hh mm ss 02 35 165 Current Date 1970 01 02 New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 101 02 Time Zone UTC v Daylight Saving Time Start Date First Y Sunda v of Janu vja 0 Y End Date F Y v of January vi at 0 00 v It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Person s Name Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protoc
114. to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test MGS3700 12C User s Guide This chapter explains the syslog screens 41 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 137 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message Mo or A WW NM ej oO Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes MGS3700 12C
115. to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 46 Port VLAN Trunking c E A O N v v2 N Co V1 v2 9 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting Switch Setup screen Figure 47 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type L Switch Setup Ce VLAN Tyne 802 10 C Port Based 9 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be e sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag e sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not e blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 1 Static VLAN Status See Section 9 1 on page 117 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application g
116. tunnel protocol attribute 265 Network example 256 server 256 settings 257 setup 257 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 147 rear panel 43 reboot load configuration 361 reboot system 361 registration product 437 related documentation 3 remote management 386 service 387 trusted computers 387 resetting 53 360 to factory default settings 360 restoring configuration 53 362 RFC 3164 391 Round Robin Scheduling 228 routing protocols 424 RSTP 147 rubber feet 32 S safety certifications 426 safety warnings 7 save configuration 52 360 Secure Shell See SSH security 424 service access control 385 service port 386 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP Small Form factor Pluggable SFP 37 SNMP 368 agent 368 and MIB 368 and security 369 authentication 376 communities 375 management model 368 manager 368 MIB 369 network components 368 object variables 368 protocol operations 369 security 376 setup 374 377 version 3 369 versions supported 368 SNMP traps 370 AAA 372 AC prefer 371 interface 371 IP 373 setup 377 switch 373 system 370 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 147 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 228 SSH encryption methods 381 how it works 380 implementation 381 SSH Secure Shell 379 SSL Secure Socket Layer 381 standby ports 186 static bindings 269 static link aggregation example 192 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index static MAC address 137 static MAC forwarding 127 130 137 static multicas
117. two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 195 SSH Communication Example N Internet p L e Samra wa ll SSH Server LCAJ m SSH Client MGS3700 12C User s Guide 379 Chapter 39 Access Control 39 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 196 How SSH Works X Internet a i SS 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 39 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods D
118. up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination IP Address IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Routing is always based on Mask network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults MGS3700 12C User s G
119. vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s e The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoE 32 3 PPPoE Use this screen to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Click Click here to open the Intermediate Agent screen Figure 160 Advanced Application gt PPPoE ED PPPOE g intermediate Agent Click here 32 4 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Use this screen to configure the Switch to give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent to display the screen as shown Figure 161 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE Active access node identifier MGS 3712D circuit id Active oO identifier string option spv delimiter Mi MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable PPPoE intermediate agent globally on the Switch access node Enter up
120. within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch Figure 20 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V1 00 06 28 2010 17 49 40 RAM Size 65536 Kbytes DRAM POST Testing 65536K OK DRAM Test SUCCESS FLASH AMD 128 T ZyNOS Version V3 90 BVO 0 b3 07 23 2010 18 43 25 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode ras atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing ras atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 21 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to
121. you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide 377 Chapter 39 Access Control 39 3 6 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time e An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 e A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown next Figure 194 Management gt Access Control gt Logins acr Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm AW ee eee qo eee d aer eee d SEN ay SS RE a ieee Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 133 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You
122. 0 ux 19 2 v 27 3 v 35 4 43 5 v 51 6 v 59 alo v ap e 20 2 28 3 36 4 v 44 5 v 52 6 60 v 5 0 v sp 21 2 B 29 3 v ar 4 45 5 7 53 6 v 61 7 Diffserv e 0 gt Joz uah aha zj xr a 3s abk afa 394 a 5 v a5 sa amp v ss e gt ex7 sal Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 117 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 37 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent When configured as a server the Switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you configure the Switch as
123. 0 12 VLAN Intermediate Agent Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrusted M Untrusted M Untrusted v Untrusted v Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted M Untrusted M Untrusted M Untrusted v Untrusted v Untrusted v Untrusted The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number x Use this row to make the settings the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoE Table 108 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are uplink ports connected to PPPoE servers e Ifa PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports e If a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Untrusted ports are
124. 0 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port List Enter the number of the port s separated by a comma on which you want to enable port security and disable MAC address learning After you click MAC freeze all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port s will become static MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check boxes and clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port list Port This field displays the port number MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Table 50 Advanced Application gt Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Swit
125. 00 Down STOP Disabled i d 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled i 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 4 i 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled i f 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled B D 0 00 00 Clear Counter Ko co i dc JO de deo do d lo k I m G Copyilght 1885 2008 by ZvXEL Communloations Corp MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window F B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is the configuration of your Switch that stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to logout of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens F This is the main window to view and or configure settings In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Basic Setting tion Advanced Application IP Application Management VLAN Static Routing Maintenance System Info Static MAC Forwarding osen
126. 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 E Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 6106 11532 0 0 0 0 0 1 15 50 12 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 12565 6936 18 53 2 872 1 15 50 EN Ay Clear Counter ear Counter C Por The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 40 on page 96 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting gt Port Setup screen Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the numbe
127. 00 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it Note In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports MGS3700 12C User s Guide 133 Chapter 9 VLAN 9 11 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen and then click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen Figure 57 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Allconnected Apply Setting Wizard Incoming ameen o 0 o0 12 n BBPBPB BEEEE 5 ADRES BEBE 12 B Ss EDEBE Rn EDEBE Ef EDEBE e E S abe 5 iv v v iv gt iv iv v v coo SSE BEBE BERGE BERS BERE Outgoing gt
128. 1 Chapter 37 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 120 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote DHCP Server 1 3 Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Relay Agent Information Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 37 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 179 Global DHCP Relay Network Example ho DHCP Server B 7 192 168 1 100 LU Inter
129. 2 1Q VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain 9 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 9 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 9 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 9 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Please ref
130. 3 4 im io io The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Source LABEL DESCRIPTION RMirror VLAN Select a RMirror VLAN ID that you configured in the RMirror screen from the drop down list box Reflector Port Enter a port number to create a reflector port 802 1p Priority Select a 802 1p Priority 0 7 from the drop down list box Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them 180 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring Table 39 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Source LABEL DESCRIPTION Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring
131. 4f 00 05 5d f4 49 20 00 50 ba ad 56 7c 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 00 1 0 b5 ae 62 32 00 30 c5 b2 62 26 00 0c 75 09 cf 88 08 00 20 ad f6 88 00 90 27 be a2 8c 00 0c 75 098 17 1a 00 a0 c5 3f91 56 00 85 a0 01 01 04 00 a0 c5 5e df f8 00 85 a0 01 01 00 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic static dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 145 Management gt ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with corresponding MAC address below MAC This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above Address Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static MGS3700 12C User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 45 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 215 Management gt Configure Clone C Configure Clone Source Destination Pa ss Port Features mi gt amp o Name Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Basic Setting Intrusion
132. 90 ping 390 system log 390 Differentiated Service DiffServ 341 DiffServ activate 344 and TRTCM 346 DS field 341 DSCP 341 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 347 network example 342 PHB 342 dimensions 419 disclaimer 435 double tagged frames 231 DS Differentiated Services 341 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 347 service level 341 what it does 342 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index DSCP DiffServ Code Point 341 dynamic link aggregation 185 E egress port 135 egress rate and bandwidth control 171 Error Disable 78 error disable recovery configuration 315 overview 311 Ethernet broadcast address 407 Ethernet port test 390 external authentication server 256 F fan speed 101 FCC interference statement 435 file transfer using FTP command example 364 filename convention configuration configuration file names 363 filtering 145 rules 145 filtering database MAC table 403 firmware 100 upgrade 361 398 flow control 113 back pressure 113 IEEE802 3x 113 forwarding delay 164 frames tagged 126 untagged 126 front panel 35 FTP 363 file transfer procedure 364 restrictions over WAN 365 G GARP 118 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 118 GARP terminology 119 GARP timer 107 118 general features 423 general setup 102 getting help 55 Gigabit ports 36 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 103 GVRP 118 125 126 and port assignment 126 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 118 H hardware installatio
133. ADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets from PPPoE clients This tag is defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for this feature Table 102 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format The Tag_Type is 0x0105 for vendor specific tags as defined in RFC 2516 The Tag_Len indicates the length of Value i1 and i2 The Value is the 32 bit number 0x00000DES which stands for the ADSL Forum IANA entry i1 and i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub options which contain additional information about the PPPoE client MGS3700 12C User s Guide 317 Chapter 32 PPPoE 32 2 1 Sub Option Format There are two types of sub option Agent Circuit ID Sub option and Agent Remote ID Sub option They have the following formats Table 103 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format User defined String SubOpt Length Value Table 104 PPPoE IA Remote ID Sub option Format SubOpt Length Value The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option and 2 identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub option The next field specifies the length of the field The Switch takes the Circuit ID string you manually configure for a VLAN on a port as the highest priority and the Circuit ID string for a port as the second priority In addition the Switch puts the PPPoE client s MAC address into the Agent Remote ID Sub option if you do not specify any user defined string 32 2 1 1 Flexible Circuit ID Syntax w
134. Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only Action Select Discard source to drop the frames from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop the frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index numb
135. B TOR 270 26 1 2 ARP Ingpection CVE He EUER 272 25 r R ea a M ont du DAE EUER Lut UU Dou C da 273 25 IP Source Guard Sta BIG 2 pna terr bae perdi deREp bora a R aeae tera des 274 20A PHGP Sieh eMT 277 253 DHCP fhooplh CUE airina ania eile kam at i AAN tec Dcu eaae RD Ki 280 25 5 1 DHCP Snooping Pott Configure serisine eese Rada cei anes eats 282 285 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN CODIQUEB uice ber re asiaa iene bct Po ba cud e 283 20 0 ARP Inspec cioni SIUE opted bcati A pere Aa 285 28 8 1 BP Inspection VLAN GIBIUE cerei eto ctii codecs sacadeneeadcctedanpedaduansandccedmiuratancnceneiess 286 26 5 2 ARP Inepetion Log SAWS uuncsateossdisdiendiiecodirtnzia dad aC a pado e s dui Gr dw nu 287 20 7 ARP WSOC DOMUS ois quiste eee uisdbb bes ni dst rore equa bee Qn deep do ei bec Utd dae Feed dustber dud dqud ge 288 26 d ARP Insieclon Par GOUODIPS serre eie dua M ope ee nep o pra ue ed 290 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure aucsscucondaaepcestcirt undas eut e i aac ai taeda 292 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 27 ae 2 aL S Tye ee mel nen Sr RB Pe ee oe ee uO Eee N ee ur Ce meee ree 295 Cn E oarelciER i A ertet 295 are EicettiieEcr t e t 297 Chapter 28 VLAN MappiNig 299 29 1 VLAN Mappiho VENEN ouuucatesprsuum Eres edes scs Fo dc a bu a CE E BU ai du 299 cow IPS Mapping EKamMPIE A petucabnnsdscebennntiacedenipcaceunies 299 zc ENORMNO VLAN D
136. B is connected to switch A In this way the PPPoE server S can identify the subscriber C and may apply different settings to it MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Figure 38 Tutorial PPPoE Intermediate Agentt Tutorial Overview B Es coco E7 bw Wil ho Port 12 Trusted Port 11 Trusted C Port 12 Trusted S Port 5 Untrusted Note For related information about PPPoE IA see Section 32 4 on page 320 The settings in this tutorial are as follows Table 6 Settings in This Tutorial wc B9RT soreo vean SP CUT nemore PREOEIA PORT A Port 5 to C 1 userC 001349000004 Untrusted Port 12 to B 1 N A N A Trusted B Port 11 to A 1 N A N A Trusted Port 12 to S 1 N A N A Trusted 6 3 1 Configuring Switch A 1 Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Select Active then click Apply D Intermediate Agent eeng Port VLAN PPPoE access MGS3700 12C circuit id Active identifier string option spy delimiter x Apply Cancel Click Port on the top of the screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Select Untrusted for port 5 and enter userC as Circuit id and 00134900000A as Remote id Select Trusted for port 12 and then leave the other fields empty Click Apply rum VLAN Intermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrus
137. BJECT ID DESCRIPTION intrusionloc IntrusionLockEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 This trap is sent when intrusion k 5 2 1 lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 This trap is sent when 5 2 loopguard shuts down a port errdisable errdisableDetectTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 1 This trap is sent when an error 30 4 1 is detected on a port errdisableRecoveryTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 1 30 4 2 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically enables a port which was shut down after a specified time interval externalarm ExternalAlarmEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 This trap is sent when the external alarm is received ExternalAlarmEventClear 6 1 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 2 This trap is sent when the external alarm is stops sending an alert Dyinggasp DyingGaspEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 The trap is sent when the 5 2 1 device power goes below the normal value ACPrefer ACPreferEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 The trap is sent when the 5 2 1 Switch changes to use AC power when both AC power and DC power are available ACPreferEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 The trap is sent when the 5 2 2 Switch changes to use DC power because AC power is not available Table 127 SNMP InterfaceTraps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up L
138. BR B k b b Fr PB hn RB B hM PB b P Pb hn RB B hM b b Fr b hn RB B hM PB b Fr b Hybrid SPQ Lowest Queue None None None None v None v None v None v None v None v None v None None SEE None Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin SPQ services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest WFQ is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth portion weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights WRR scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Q0 Q7 When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth Weight is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Queues with larger
139. C Ngee Smart isolation allows you to prevent isolated ports on different switches from transmitting traffic to each other After you enable RSTP MRSTP and smart isolation on the Switch the designated port s will be added to the isolated port list In the following example switch A is the root bridge Switch B s root port 7 connects to switch A and switch B s designated port 8 connects to switch C Traffic from isolated ports on switch B can only be sent through non isolated port 1 or root port 7 to switch A This prevents isolated ports on switch B sending traffic through designated port 8 to switch C Traffic received on designated port 8 from switch C will not be forwarded to any other isolated ports on switch B Before Smart isolation Isolated ports 2 6 Root port 7 Designated port 8 After Smart Isolation Isolated ports 2 6 8 Root port 7 Designated port 8 You should enable RSTP or MRSTP before you can use smart isolation on the Switch If the network topology changes the Switch automatically updates the isolated port list with the latest designated port information MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Note The uplink port connected to the Internet should be the root port Otherwise with smart isolation enabled the isolated ports cannot access the Internet 8 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting gt Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The
140. C filtering entries These entries will then display only in the Filtering screen and the default filtering action is Discard source Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port where the above MAC address is forwarded Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 43 MAC Table MGS3700 12C User s Guide ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 44 1 ARP Table Overview 44 1 1 Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no
141. CMP inactive port v Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 31 Error Diable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect LABEL DESCRIPTION Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them Active Select this option to have the Switch detect if the configured rate limit for specific control packets is exceeded and take the action selected below Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate limit on a port set in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection screen e inactive port The Switch shuts down the port inactive reason The Switch bypasses the processing of the specified control packets such as ARP or IGMP packets or drops all the specified control packets such as BPDU on the port e rate limitation The Switch drops the additional control packets the port has to handle in every one second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save
142. Chapter 27 Loop Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays the port number i Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the switch it is connected to is in loop state If the switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide VLAN Mapping This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN mapping on the Switch 28 1 VLAN Mapping Overview With VLAN mapping enabl
143. Configuration Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the System Switch Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults In the Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 185 Load Factory Default Start E x Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 32 Are you sure you want to load Factory default Cancel In the web configurator click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 38 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on th
144. DOTS MIBE xinosutiquenitids e aequa ebrei caben pH Abo RE Regn Mec a t MT 369 aus SNMP TERR ose ane ten tere detto E iot Mp bore aad hecdQ raras ues 370 ccscm Esos viv aeter 374 28 35 Dehnguimig SNMP Tram CE ausencia satelite 377 oe AG paing Up LOJN A ACCOUME dierned a EAEE 378 28 4 59 PI CAPE aosa 379 SO AO led ei TET OTT D 380 396 SSH Implementation onthe SWIG iiis iiio trece constant oeae aiana E 381 28 B 1 Requirements TOF Using DIOE Lesson ieit Lnd as an heal beens 381 Cy nrooucion TO MTT TPS S o 7 SS 0S 381 Se MTIR S Ea NG ecc Ed 382 39 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages iesus esame sa cuninmme acute unku 382 39 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages contre trahe teneas tena Rn teta aa kR Bee 383 ee e MAN SCEE aia RTT DET 385 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Table of Contents 2959 Serice POM ACCESS DOR Aoosssatiaes Hood pees a tits acc ona pb aa P PU E PLUR 385 eaa e o nop a m M ES 386 Chapter 40 B Y 389 MUST eni P 389 Chapter 41 DUBIO uie asumine titan ise RE aR In ORE IRAK AME EAREU0 MEL A E E 391 CINE i NTE MERI a GLa ue eatIaurts 391 suec e 392 E123 VEDI SEV BUDE aio od M pod aw A c co ob abl ebbe c db oO RR Hp 393 Chapter 42 Giuster s cn 1 M 395 42 1 Cluster Management Status Overview sssss
145. EREE PE IEEYE EE EEREFIGREYS aai REL IN EP E FEREPEFEEETURTPR 317 32 1 PPPOE Intermediate Agent VG ANEW 1 4 erase cuecrac RR to acatebiens cnc NE UE MIR E n e uA EDU RA MEE 317 32 2 PPPOE Intermediate Agent Tag Format iiis iec eise ceca siereccmasiiecenisn cenit 317 eee EOI PPE IAL r E eet E E E A E AE es 318 ad A EE oro A E ob a P nid E E E op E a 319 ut PPPOE supna a emer Te uia 320 Bee PPPOE imermedale AGON qu 320 OFF Oe PESE sxmantoeriaumnannaidaiiasrtat Lara doqacba eee HO ee 321 dowd PPPOETSESEPOIL Per VLAN enoaan 324 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Table of Contents 226 PPPOE IA Tor YLAN cscnirsesd endet e a not e ord enl dado Rc br ta 325 Chapter 33 Private VLAN M 327 2 Puvate VLAN Cre aedisscetensescdtprbnit dett eupaee saan eR Rees iba A Spr REOR 327 cx OCMC Privala VLAN e RP 328 Chapter 34 Green Ethernet P A X A A 331 341 Green Ehemet OVE Oy PR TU LT 331 colas ee Tips Green mig Ii MERE a aN N iai 332 ax 184124 do lt 2 e 2 rn 335 Chapter 35 coi 337 854 Suae POI OVEN ssaiebeadir tide adero dira dona ue Po eld c bod Er tea da 337 abr Conigu unng Statie ROUNO arinaren gest neu d On Ua Fate ad ciae eibi aaa balnea aa 338 Chapter 36 lii
146. ES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 39 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 39 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refe
147. Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector Note You must have the sFlow collector already configured in the sFlow gt Collector screen The sFlow collector does not need to be in the same subnet as the Switch but it must be accessible from the Switch Note Configure UDP port 6343 the default on a NAT router to allow port forwarding if the collector is behind a NAT router Configure a firewall rule for UDP port 6343 the default to allow incoming traffic if the collector is behind a firewall Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 2 1 sFlow Collector Configuration Click the Collector link in the sFlow screen to display the screen as shown You can configure up to four sFlow collectors in this screen You may want to configure more than one collector if the traffic load to be monitored is more than one collector can manage Figure 155 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector xin P Collector Collector Address UDP Port Index Port 0 0 0 0 5343 Add Cancel Clear Collector Address UDP Port Delete Delete Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 30 sFlow The followin
148. FEATURE DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch Authentication Authorization and Accounting The Switch supports authentication authorization and accounting services via RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy the settings you configure on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it toa syslog server Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the Switch s configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to
149. Forwarding Delay 1 o 32768 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 2 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 Port Active Edge Priority Path Cost Tree o ly 128 128 128 128 128 A Ww n SRY RY RY S Erg rg amt um lt E Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 73 on page 157 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the p
150. IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Services Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN You configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Figure 52 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example Tagged Frames Internet A Untagged Frames c y T ELT 10 1 1 0 24 VID 300 9 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown MGS3700 12C User s Guide 127 Chapter 9 VLAN Note Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged V
151. IPTION VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup MGS3700 12C User s Guide Static Multicast Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static Multicast address forwarding 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group A static multicast address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table Static multicast addresses do not age out Static multicast forwarding allows you the administrator to forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first If a multicast group has no members then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or drop them You can configure this in the Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting screen see Section 24 3 on page 241 Figure 60 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports With static multicast forwarding you can forward these multicasts to port s within a VLAN group Figure 61 shows frames being forwarded to devices MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 11 St
152. LAN Figure 53 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based z d AN Vlan Port Setting Active O DHCP Vlan Override 1 Apply Active r1 Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Add Cancel Index Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address Override through the DHCP VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 19 Advanced Application g
153. Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol based VLAN Port based VLAN MAC Authentication Advanced Application Two rate three color marker Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping VLAN Mapping LLDP sFlow PPPoE IA CPUProtection F1 Fl EI EI EI EI CI Fl BI EI EI CI El CI CI CI El CI EI OI CI PI FI EI DEC CIL EI EI CI Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 45 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 146 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are Destination copied Port Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example e 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports e 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus Setting should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the
154. MGS3700 12C MetroGigabit Switch Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 1 1 http 192 168 0 1 Out of band MGMT port User Name admin Password 1234 Firmware Version 3 90 Edition 15 11 2012 www zyxel com Copyright 2012 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Switch using the web configurator Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your Switch up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access e Web Configurator Online Help The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information e Command Reference Guide The Command Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI and CLI commands to configure the Switch Note It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch e Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan MGS3700 12C User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Need More Help More help
155. MVR Ports 24 6 2 24 6 3 In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table o
156. None Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 92 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Sw
157. Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 Table 77 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION VLAN Assignment ATTRIBUTE Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Typ 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch 25 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This appendix lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 1 Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name The format of the User Name attribute is enabZ where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 25 3 1 2 Attribute
158. P and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen 2 Select the Active check box 3 Enter the DHCP server s IP address 192 168 2 3 in this example in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field 4 Select the Option 82 and the Information check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 5 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 37 Tutorial Set DHCP Server and Relay Information ED DHCP Relay Status Active Vv Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 2 3 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information M Option 82 Information Iv MES 3728 Apply Cancel Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently The DHOP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request 6 2 4 Troubleshooting Check the client A s IP address If it did not receive the IP address 172 16 1 18 make sure Client A is connected to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 You configured the correct VLAN ID port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP server and the Switch You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect 6 3 How to Use PPPoE IA on the Switch You want to configure PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the switch A to pass a subscriber C s information to a PPPoE server S There is another switch B between switch A and server S Switch
159. P version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 67 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a Num port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports
160. RaEE LE LUN RARE Ed 31 2 9 Mounino the SUID ona Rak Losses rodax a ge E nnn d bd Rad vai 32 2 3 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements sesssssssessrrreesssrnnserennneernnnnnsrnnnnenennnnnnnnenn 32 2 3 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch sesssssseeess 33 23 9 Mouniog tno SWITCH on A PACK sourina a an GR dua 34 Chapter 3 Hardware QVOIVIOW A 35 cu AI M 35 SRI Comoe dl M EAN 36 chuc chasis Met e TT 36 DES ROE a Gee P 37 MGS3700 12C User s Guide EN Table of Contents AAU a TE PEEL E ribera A Dur ac ade p A dana faa c SD uss 39 aa PO PMN T E A ERU Oa aep E Ua Susi amar dug uiua 39 The aga ke e ey celal aye E a ei aaedaereatonG 41 oe Pa ul T 43 LEDS EE 43 JA Conigunng ihe SWO Ne 44 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 47 CB Ui ia alk ul o EL DTI T TI 47 ey adams 47 4 Ihe Web batte aser Layout saaneina aAA eoa EU Port ec d dnd ohne 48 43r Gbange Your Fassword c 52 24 Savin Your Congue gll seara rac o eise In pides NER i pac du RR repu i nd 52 cen eoe i a mc 53 At FRSA TG SCM ecc E 53 2 5 1 Reload the Configuration FB eapite preti aor Rn eee GER e aga E E a 53 AF Logging Qui or the Web CORITQDESDOE aissasxuonndcebinim ds Acuto aac dadai rbd baa d darker niue adn b edd 55 a e
161. SCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring CVID Enter a customer VLAN ID the inner VLAN tag from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets from the subscribers SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more background information on VLAN ID MGS3700 12C User s Guide 237 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 65 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest No change do not change the frame s priority on this port Add Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the number of the selective VLAN stacking rule Active This s
162. Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 i812 E 2 0 0 0 0 i812 E Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 i13 O 2 0 0 0 0 ji813 O Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide 257 Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry
163. Ss 12 1 10 Apply Cancel Figure 58 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Portisolation Apply Setting Wizard ia mamen o0 o 12 11 ula peee SSSR m m mm mm mm AAAA Zi L 12 Iv r TEREE gt ia e CPU e BERG gt EE ao e Bie REDE ee L 0 LL L iv r 6 7 8 9 Outgoing O0 O 0 s iv r iv 12 M M iv CPU 12 11 10 PETI MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Port Based VLAN Setup label Description Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the s
164. Switch add the slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 280 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapter 8 on page 99 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 280 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 86 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen
165. Switch send the packets to the out of band management port This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these packets Select I n Band to have the Switch send the packets to all ports except the out of band management port to which connected device s do not receive these packets In Band Management IP Address DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address automatically Static IP Address Select this option if you don t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address information to the Switch You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 254 VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the Switch IP address This is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only The default is 1 All ports by default are fixed members of this management VLAN in order to manage the device from any port If a port is not a member of this VLAN then users on that port cann
166. TI aAA 300 250 CON ILA ONIN oco daistersi Sede beoe n gdd EPA pedo thee Wiagasenuicauanceeibiediad a mlasalanuiacons 301 Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunnelitigj iue iai eei ax conii nts diii Clu cip Ra ES E tod dpa D Nd pK QUUD 303 29 1 Layer Z Protocol Tunneling CVerviBW sseec rod e a e GU Reb UD YR PORE ARD ERR E 303 29 1 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode 1223 ci Gu csiceepasuasaspvedoueusdeencataeduresdeuguauremsceduaidenss 304 29 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tuhrtelintij oe resi nonnai 305 Chapter 30 SPIOW M 307 CONE ur Ie 0j E A Pep 307 0 9 EPIca CONTIG dascpcutisqbeuxadeii Deeuidiu dete iedebrobet legit so pid imb Ecb Meg i eC UE dM paper d qu ERU DOMI DR 308 20 2 Slav Collector DOR ROTE a bci pij p RUD dt e b RU eed des 309 Chapter 31 Error oj 311 cameli parent i Ovario te E 311 31 2 Emor Disable Recovery DUOIVIDN 1eiccidee pee rem oec plena echo Roe ceste n eese c hide eeu ue te epe iced 311 21 2 Ie Enor DIGS Ble ISOPSEN isis ptu eo Su Dro CR Ea UR Hd UBL E ont dU Da DOE s 312 Bp GP Fratecon OSIROIUIIUDI iieii basi Got pPrutagub vu Ua n eu GDte Pp dT ddUR Pec caen cH ERE 812 21 5 Emor Disable Detect Cono SEDIT usssncasux tacto a rd FO shana tate Ro a gu Pd 213 31 6 Error Disable Recovery Configuratio iussus educ nainun beatos nebat era aa ka 315 Chapter 32 PPPOE 02 d COEUR READER XXE FUR FEET case sense HAT EE ETE
167. Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Enabled Select this option to turn on the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN Circuit id Select this option to make the Circuit ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Remote id Select this option to make the Remote ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Private VLAN This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to prevent communications between ports in a VLAN 33 1 Private VLAN Overview Private VLAN allows you to do port isolation within a VLAN in a simple way You specify which port s in a VLAN is not isolated by adding it to the promiscuous port list The Switch automatically adds other ports in this VLAN to the isolated port list and blocks traffic between the isolated ports A promiscuous port can communicate with any port in the same VLAN An isolated port can communicate with the promiscuous port s only Note You can have up to one private
168. VLAN rules for each VLAN Figure 165 Private VLAN Example Ne N see l a VLAN 123 l wa lt gt lt gt Isolated ports 2 6 I E Promiscuous port 10 Note Make sure you keep at least one port in the promiscuous port list for a VLAN with private VLAN enabled Otherwise this VLAN is blocked from the whole network MGS3700 12C User s Guide 327 Chapter 33 Private VLAN 33 2 Configuring Private VLAN Click Advanced Application gt Private VLAN in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 166 Advanced Application gt Private VLAN Active Name VLAN ID Private VLAN Promiscuous Ports Index Active Ada Cancel Clear Name VLAN Promiscuous Ports Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 111 Advanced Application gt Private VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to enable private VLAN in a VLAN Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN to which this rule applies Promiscuous Ports Enter the number of the port s that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN Other ports belonging to this VLAN will be added to the isolation list and can only send and receive traffic from the port s you specify here Add Click Add to insert the
169. VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 43 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup Eircom VLAN Type 9 ed Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active o Smart Isolation Active F MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 imilliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level 7 Level6 Bv Level5 5 Level4 4 w Level3 3 v Level2 1 v Levelt om Leveld 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Basic Setting Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control protocols Protocol STP for example You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Transparency Port Setup screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Smart Select Active to enable smart isolation on the Switch The designated Isolation port s then becomes the isolated port Smart isolation allows you to prevent isolated ports on different
170. a peer to automatically negotiate and build a logical port aggregation LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates and manages trunk groups UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer s port it connected to monitor the physical status of a link Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and forward them to the tunnel port s Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Note You can enable L2PT services for STP LACP VTP CDP UDLD and PAGP on the access port s only Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network The Switch decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by changing the destination MAC address to the original one and then forward them to an access port If the service s is not enabled on an access port the protocol packets are dropped Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide sFlow This chapter shows you how to configure sFlow to have t
171. a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 9 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 9 1 on page 117 for more information on static VLAN To configure a MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 50 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN ORR aD VLAN Status ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Address Learning Fd Port Control Tagging Normal v 7 Tx Tagging 1 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden Yi Tx Tagging 2 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden iV Tx Tagging 3 Q Norma Fixed Forbidden IVi Tx Tagging Q Normal Fixed D Forbidden V Tx Tagging 5 Q Norma Fixed D Forbidden v Tx Tagging 6 9 Normal Fixed Forbidden L Tx Tagging 7 Normal Fixed Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 8 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden V Tx Tagging 9 Q Norma Fixed Forbidden V Tx Tagging 10 Q Norma Fixed Forbidden L Tx Tagging 11 Q Norma Fixed Forbidden Yi Tx Tagging 12 Q Normal Fixed Forbidden L Tx Tagging Ada Cancel Clear VID Active Name Learning Delete 1 Yes 1 Active E 100 Yes VLAN 100 Active Beieis Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select thi
172. ad only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal not
173. agement gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade to view the screen as shown next Figure 187 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade J Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse C Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number 38 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 188 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on th
174. agging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending frames out of these ports MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off D Static V D Name VLAN Group ID Address Learning Port Normal Normal Normal Normal gt Normal Normal Normal oon C tn amp h wh 9 9 Normal 9 Q 9 Normal 11 C Control Normal Fixed D Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed VLAN 200 Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden 10 Normal 9 Fixed O Forbidden T Tx Tagging Add Cancel Clear VLAN Status Tagging 7 Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging RISE I Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging SSS Tx Tagging Pee 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen ED VLAN Status g VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 4 Index VID P 1 2 102 3 123 4 200 Change Pages VLAN Port Settin Elapsed Time 2 59 05 2 59 05 2 59 05 0 00 07 Static VLAN Status Static Static Static Static 9 Enter 200 in the PVI D field for ports 1 2 3 and 10 to add a tag to incoming untagge
175. ake some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 25 on page 148 for more i
176. al FAN2 6185 12918 5863 500 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 1 2VIN 1 191 1 204 1 191 5 Normal 1 5VIN 1 505 1 517 1 505 26 Normal 3 3VIN 3 325 3 342 3 325 596 Normal 2 5VIN 2 565 2 565 2 539 596 Normal 12 0VIN 11 718 11 718 11 656 10 Normal The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification Name purposes ZyNOS F W _ This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware Version including the date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Address Switch Power Source Status Note This section is not available for all MGS models Power Source Mode Your Switch supports AC Prefer which has the Switch use AC power when both AC power and DC power are available Once AC power is not available the Switch automatically uses DC power and changes back when the AC power is restored MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION AC Power This field displays On when the Switch is using AC power and Absent when AC power is not available DC Power This field displays On when the Switch is using DC power Present when the Switch is connected to DC power but
177. ality interface The Switch uses up to one connection for each mini GBIC and 1000Base T Ethernet pair The mini GBIC slots have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC slot and the corresponding GbE port are connected at the same time the GbE port will be disabled MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview When auto negotiation is turned on a Ethernet port negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off an Ethernet port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Negotiation Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Gigabit ports on the Switch are e Speed Auto e Duplex Auto e Flow control Off e Link Aggregation Disabled 3 1 2 2 Auto crossover All ports are auto crossover that is auto MDIX ports Media Dependent Interface Crossover so you may use either a straight through Ethernet cable or crossover Ethernet cable for all Gigabit port connections Auto crossover ports automatically sense whether they need to function as cross
178. all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configuration file 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all MGS3700 12C User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software 2 Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode
179. all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 24 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 115 MVR Network Example MGS3700 12C User s Guide 247 Chapter 24 Multicast 24 6 1 Types of
180. ally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed on a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 21 on page 219 to configure policy rules 20 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 21 on page 219 MGS3700 12C User s Guide n Chapter 20 Classifier Click Advanced Application gt Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 100 Advanced Application gt Classifier t Classifier Active C Name Packet Format All VLAN Seay e Priority 2 any c os
181. ame broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things e It pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B e It pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 12 on page 145 e They are stored only in volatile memory e They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use 272 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard e They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 26 1 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard
182. anagement accounts configured on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS also available Maximum Frame Size 13 K 13312 bytes VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router MAC Address Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Relay DHCPv6 Relay Use this feature to have the Switch forward DHCP requests to DHCP servers on your network IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping proxy The Switch supports IGMP snooping and MLD snooping proxy enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 47 Product Specifications Table 148 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Queuing Queuing is used to
183. anning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 13 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree MGS3700 12C User s Guide 1 47 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 2 Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 25 STP Path Costs LINK RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED SPEED VALUE RANGE RANGE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 On each bridge the root port is the port through which this
184. atabase Agent URL Timeout interval Write delay interval Renew DHCP Snooping URL DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping r Disable 300 seconds 300 seconds Apply Cancel Renew MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 26 5 2 on page 283 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location shoul
185. ate you should examine tfis eec dh Are you willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identil p 48 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site ox e sw Figure 200 Security Certificate 2 Netscape i2 Syn top Security Error Domain Name Mismatch 3 X You have attempted to establish a connection with 192 A 58 1 1 However security cePNficate presented ossible though cept your If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate Cancel Help MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control 39 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection Figure 201 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection p 151 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea Back gt amp A A Reach Gyravorites BPmeda E 5 Bd SH Cy s Q Settings Address https 192 168 1 1 rpSys html sc WAP Go Links E Google ID Save Status A Logout B Help Ba etti ED Port Status Ad ced Application Port Name L
186. atic Multicast Forward Setup connected to port 3 Figure 62 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4 Figure 60 No Static Multicast Forwarding 11 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Click Advanced Applications gt Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding NN Active IV Name Static Multicast Rule Example MAC Address foi oo e foo o aS O VID fi Port f1 3 5 10 Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this static multicast MAC address forwarding rule This is for identification only MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group The last binary bit of the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1 For
187. ation MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index Numbers 802 1P priority 113 A AAA 255 AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting 255 AC power status 101 AC prefer 100 AC prefer trap 371 access control limitations 367 login account 378 remote management 386 service port 385 SNMP 368 accounting 255 setup 261 address learning MAC 127 130 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 407 409 410 administrator password 378 age 164 aggregator ID 189 191 aging time 107 ALM LED 44 applications backbone 25 bridging 26 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 27 switched workgroup 27 ARP how it works 407 viewing 408 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 407 ARP inspection 269 272 and MAC filter 272 configuring 273 Index syslog messages 273 trusted ports 273 authentication 255 setup 261 Authentication Authorization and Accounting see AAA 255 authorization 255 privilege levels 262 setup 261 auto crossover 37 automatic VLAN registration 118 B back up configuration file 363 Backup Power Supply BPS 43 backup system status 101 bandwidth control 169 423 egress rate 171 ingress rate 170 setup 170 basic settings 99 basic setup tutorial 63 binding 269 binding table 269 building 269 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 148 BPS LED 43 BPS status 101 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 148 bridging 423 broadcast storm control 173 C CDP 306 certifications 435 notices 436 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index
188. ation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for accounting is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do So MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 74 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 25 2 3 AAA Setup Use this screen to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 127 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup OF EO Authentication E Type Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Privilege Enable local gt
189. ation lidp transceiver ddm macoverthreshold AAA 7 authentication accounting IP ping traceroute Switch stp mactable rmon cfm Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 132 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are Destination IP the IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 39 3 3 on page 370 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when
190. atus continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted 26 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status Figure 138 ARP Inspection Log Status c ARF Inspection Log Status Status Clearing log status table Apply Total number of logs 0 Index Port VID Sender Mac Sender IP Num Pkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated table by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Total number o
191. baoo Apply Cancel v boo 5 Ada Cancel IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example MGS3700 12C User s Guide Tutorials This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch The tutorials include e How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch e How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch e How to Use PPPoE IA on the Switch e How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch e How to Set Up a Guest VLAN e How to Do Port Isolation in a VLAN 6 1 How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch You only want DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN network V Create a VLAN containing ports 5 6 and 7 Connect a computer M to the Switch s MGMT port Figure 25 Tutorial DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview Note For related information about DHCP snooping see Section 26 1 on page 269 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials The settings in this tutorial are as the following Table 5 Tutorial Settings in this Tutorial HOST CONNECTED VLAN PVID PORT TRUSTED DHCP Server A 5 1 and 100 100 Yes DHCP Client B 6 1andi00 100 No DHCP Client C 7 1and100 100 No 1 Access the Switch from the MGMT port through http 192 168 0 1 by default Log into the Switch by entering the username default admin and pa
192. bleFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 This trap is sent when more 5 2 1 than 99 of the MAC table is used MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 This trap is sent when less than 5 2 2 95 of the MAC table is used rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold CFM dotiagCfmFaultAlarm 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 0 1 The trap is sent when the Switch detects a connectivity fault 39 3 4 Configuring SNMP Click Management gt Access Control gt SNMP to view the screen as shown Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings Figure 192 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP SNMP J Access Control Trap Group General Setting Version vec m Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version IP Port Username vac x 0 0 0 0 162 vec v 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 User Information index Username Security Level Authentication Privacy 1 admin noauth MD5 DES Apply Cancel 374 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 131 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP
193. c VLAN VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 3 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 5 19 47 Static 2 102 5 19 47 Static 3 123 0 05 28 Static 9 Enter 123 in the PVID field for ports 2 3 4 and 5 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on these ports so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory OMENS ED Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP o Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation o Oo All v O o 1 o 1 o LES oO Oo 2 L1 Oo oO o 3 o oO o o E o oO o o 5 oO L1 oO 6 L1 1 o All yj o o 7 o 1 o Aly Oo o 8 D 1 o Al Y m o IO O O PA S cn cr d mea ond 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 6 2 Creating a Private VLAN Rule Follow the steps below to configure private VLAN for VLAN 123 Click Advanced Application gt Private VLAN In the Private VLAN screen select Active Enter a descriptive name PrivateVLAN123 for example in the Name field and enter 123 in the VLAN ID field List the port s that can communicate with any port in VLAN 123 5 in this example Then other ports in this VLAN 2 3 and 4 for example will be added to the isolated port list and cannot send traffic to each other Click Add
194. cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password 378 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 133 Management gt Access Control gt Logins continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the CLI Reference Guide User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 39 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between
195. ceiving port The Switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority Priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 11 on page 106 for more information BPDU Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate Control bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done confi
196. ch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Alarm Threshold Alarm threshold of learned MAC address Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide 207 Chapter 19 Port Security 19 3 VLAN MAC Address Limit Use this screen to set the MAC address learning limit on per port and per VLAN basis Click VLAN MAC Address Limit in the Advanced Application gt Port Security screen to display the screen as shown Figu
197. ch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples e 4 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log nel is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second e 6 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Enter how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard ARP packets on each untrusted port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure
198. check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 25 on page 148 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Canc
199. cify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 12147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Enter 0 if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 171024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 26 6 2 on page 287 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 90 ARP Inspection Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog rate Enter the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 41 on page 391 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Swit
200. computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Appendix A Common Services Table 151 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol GRE enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and net
201. cond a configuration message Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration Digest A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST
202. conforming exceeding or violating the criteria MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services 36 2 1 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets e Red high loss priority level packets are dropped e Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network e Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both exis
203. continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Management Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local Port configuration of the Switch Signal Slot Connect the signal input pins to signal output terminals on other pieces of equipment Connect the signal output pins to a signal input terminal on another piece of equipment See Chapter 47 on page 419 for details on the pin assignments required 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters e VT100 e Terminal emulation e 9600 bps e No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit e No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports The Switch has 1000Base T auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 10 100 1000 Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 10 Mbps 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 10 100 1000 Mbps and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable Four of the 1000Base T Ethernet ports are paired with a mini GBIC slot to create a dual person
204. creen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN MGS3700 12C User s Guide Static MAC Forward Set
205. d D in the same spanning tree even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B C and D Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider s network To emulate a point to point topology between two customer switches at different sites such as A and B you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 2 for PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP or UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection Figure 151 L2PT Network Example 1 Service Provider s Network 29 1 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes Access and Tunnel e The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider s edge device 1 or 2 in Figure 151 on page 304 and connected to a customer switch A or B Incoming layer 2 protocol packets received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports e The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider s network and connected to another service provider s switch Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 29 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Click Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figur
206. d IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 26 6 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status Figure 137 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Show VLAN range r OF Inspection VLAN Status Status Enabled VLAN C Selected VLAN Start VID End VID VID Received Apply Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VID and the highest VLAN ID End VID you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 88 ARP Inspection VLAN St
207. d be expressed like this tftp domain name or IP address directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Write delay Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update interval the DHCP snooping database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update Renew DHCP Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew Snooping URL if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 26 4 on page 277 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 84 DHCP Snooping Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link
208. d frames received on these ports so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory c NBUEMXNBEINEDNSSIENNN Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP Fi Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation o All Y El Ej 1 O o L1 o 2 o o o L1 3 o o L1 o 4 o 1 o All v o o 5 o 1 o All v o o 6 O 1 o All s P o 7 o 1 L1 All M L1 Oo 8 o 1 o All v o o 9 1 1 o All v o m L1 L1 o N S s z lt _ All lt Cr 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 6 5 2 Enabling IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Follow the steps below to enable port authentication to validate access to ports 1 8 to clients based on a RADIUS server 1 Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication and then the Click Here link for 802 1x Port Authentication 802 1x Click here MAC Authentication Click here MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Select the first Active checkbox to enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch Select the Active checkboxes for ports 1 to 8 to turn on 802 1x authentication on the selected ports Click Apply DEJAD Port Authentication Guest Vlan Active P
209. d out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including TCP 21 large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used MULTICAST when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client
210. dd Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 C News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 1 Figure 122 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration ND MVR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address fo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All 200 1 Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 254 MGS3700 12C User s Guide AAA This chapter describes how to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an
211. dd or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click e Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance e Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance e Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 25 on pa
212. dress your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details 3 Turn the Switch off and on 4 Disconnect and re connect the cord to the Switch 5 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 53 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 41 7 Chapter 46 Troubleshooting Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default cannot see some of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels Adjust the value in your computer and then you should see the rest of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet HTTP and SSH Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management gt Diagnostic screen to check for unauthorized access to your Switch To avoid unauthorized access configure the secured client setting in the Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management screen for telnet HTTP and SSH see Section 39 10 on page 386 Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch 46 3 Switch Configuration lost my configuration settings after
213. dvanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol packets so that other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provider s network STP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel STP Spanning Tree Protocol packets so that STP can run properly across the service provider s network and spanning trees can be set up based on bridge information from all local and remote networks VTP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets so that all customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider s network Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol and UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection tunneling for a point to point topology Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco s proprietary data link layer protocols PAgP is similar to LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically UDLD is to determine the link s physical status and detect a unidirectional link PAGP Select this option to have the Switch send PAgP packets to
214. dwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control 14 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control Bandwidth Control Active Ingress Rate Port Active Egress Rate Egress Burst Active Commit Rate Commit Burst Active Peak Rate Peak Burst Kbps Kbits Kbps Kbits Kbits Kbps 1 1 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 Kbits Kbps 1 2 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 Kbits Kbps 1 3 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 Kbits Kbps 1 4 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 Kbits Kbps 1 5 1 Kbps 0 Kbits Kbps 0 Kbits 0 Kbits ec ee ew ud Me c cT 1 7 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 Kbits Kbps 1 8 1 Kbps l0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 Kbits The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some
215. e Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 24 8 1 MVR Con The following figuration Example figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic Figure 119 MVR Configuration Example r To configure t L A ee eee he MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 120 MVR Configuration Example Oi D gt Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active v Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID 200 802 1p Priority o Mode Dynamic C Compatible Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Figure 121 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration Multicast VLAN ID 200 z lt z Name Start Address End Address Movie 230 1 2 50 30 12 60 A
216. e 56 on page 216 for more information Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 20 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the I ndex field Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer rule Figure 101 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 Delete Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated
217. e Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority 0 gt Mode Dynamic Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None C 1 e e e E 2 O Lol DL 3 e e O 4 e e r1 5 e e e O 6 O e m 7 e e r 8 e e 3 Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 70 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 70 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL
218. e 152 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Layer 2 Protocol Tunne Active O Destination MAC Address no DO po DO po DO Point to Point Port CDP STP VTP Mode PAGP LACP UDLD O C m O O O Access x 1 O O O O O Access 2 O O O O r1 O Access 3 O O O O O E Access 4 O O O O O O Access 5 E O O m E E Access 7 6 O C O O O O Access 7 O O O O O O Access 8 O rJ O O O O Access 9 O O m O O O Access 10 O O O O O E Access 11 O O O O O r1 Access 12 O O O O O O Access Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch Destination Specify an MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the MAC Address layer 2 protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets Note The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address If you use a unicast MAC address make sure the MAC address does not exist in the address table of a switch on the service provider s network Note All the edge switches in the service provider s network should be set to use the same MAC address for encapsulation Port This field displays the port number MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Table 96 A
219. e Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration Note Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch 38 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 186 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer 1 x 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system i Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 38 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance Click Man
220. e Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance 38 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 189 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration Backup Configuration _ Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 38 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 38 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customiz
221. e Switch detects a pre configured error It also shows you how to configure the Switch to automatically undo the action after the error is gone 31 1 CPU Protection Overview Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information If a switch receives large numbers of control packets such as ARP BPDU or IGMP packets which are to be processed by the CPU the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular tasks properly The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP BPDU and IGMP packets to be delivered to the CPU on a port This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS attacks or errors from other network s You then can choose to drop control packets that exceed the specified rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received 31 2 Error Disable Recovery Overview Some features such as loop guard or CPU protection allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port For example if the Switch detects that packets sent out the port s loop back to the Switch the Switch can shut down the port s automatically After that you need to enable the port s or allow the packets on a port manually via the web configurator or the commands With error disable recovery you can set the disabled port s to become active or start receiving the packets again after the time interval you speci
222. e figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port e Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port 232 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 60 VLAN Tag Format TPID Priority VID TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802 1Q Other vendors may use a different value such as 0x9100 Tunnel TPID is the VLAN stacking tag type the Switch adds to the outgoing frames sent through a Tunnel Port of the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for e On the Switch
223. e for any reason Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindings counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the CLI Refer
224. e next update of the DHCP snooping database Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now Abort timer expiry This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts T
225. e rack MGS3700 12C User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the Switch The front panel contains the Switch LEDs 12 dual personality interfaces each consisting of a mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter slot and an RJ 45 Gigabit Ethernet GbE port one console and one management port for local management and a slot for alarm management Figure 8 Front Panel Console Port Management Port Oe eee Signal slot Dual Personality Interfaces The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 1 Front Panel Connections LABEL DESCRIPTION 12 Dual Each interface has one 1000BASE T RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Personality Pluggable SFP slot also called a mini GBIC slot with one port or Interfaces transceiver active at a time e 12 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Ports Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches using 1000BASE T compatible Category 5 5e 6 copper cables e 12 Mini GBIC Slots Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for connections to backbone Ethernet switches Console Port The console port is for local configuration of the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide 35 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 1 Front Panel Connections
226. e traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 8 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the Switch IP address default gateway device the default domain name server and the management VLAN ID The default gateway specifies the IP address of the default gateway next hop for outgoing traffic 8 6 1 Management IP Addresses The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre de
227. econds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Edge Select this
228. ect the other end of the power wire to the negative terminal on the power supply Insert the terminal block plug in the Switch s terminal block header MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 6 Signal Slot The Signal slot fitted with the signal connector allows you to connect devices to the Switch such as sensors or other ZyXEL switches which support the external alarm feature This feature is in addition to the system alarm which detects abnormal temperatures voltage levels and fan speeds on the Switch Your Switch can respond to an external signal in four ways e The ALM LED shows an alert e The Signal slot can send an external alarm on to another device By daisy chaining the signal sensor cables from one Switch to another ZyXEL switch which supports this feature the external alarm alert but not the system alarm is received on each Switch The Switch can also be configured to send an SNMP trap to the SNMP server See Section 39 3 on page 368 for more information on using SNMP The Switch can be configured to create an error log of the alarm See Section 41 1 on page 391 for more information on using the system log 3 1 6 1 Connect a Sensor to the Signal Slot This section shows you how to connect an external sensor device to the Switch 1 Use a connector to connect wires of the correct gauge to the sensor s signal output pins See Chapter 47 on page 419 for the wire specifications Check the
229. ect whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations e The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK e The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings e The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source acne and source port do not match any of the current indings e The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN a
230. ecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them e Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling e Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe e Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord e Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one e Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e The length of exposed bare power wire should not exceed 7mm Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE Rey stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical ps and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately MGS3700 12C User s Guide Safety Warnings MGS3700 12C User s Guide Contents Overview
231. ectly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 26 STP Port States eal DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 13 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEL s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Note Each port can belong to one STP tree only Figure 65 MRSTP Network Example N 13 1 5 Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backward compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the followi
232. ed the Switch can map the VLAN ID and priority level of packets received from a private network to those used in the service provider s network The Switch checks incoming traffic from the switch ports non management ports against the VLAN mapping table first the MAC learning table and then the VLAN table before forwarding them through the Gigabit uplink port When VLAN mapping is enabled the Switch discards the tagged packets that do not match an entry in the VLAN mapping table If the incoming packets are untagged the Switch adds a PVID based on the VLAN setting Note You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time 28 1 1 VLAN Mapping Example In the following example figure packets that carry VLAN ID 12 and are received on port 3 match a pre configured VLAN mapping rule The Switch translates the VLAN ID from 12 into 123 before forwarding the packets Any packets carrying a VLAN tag other than 12 such as 10 and received on port 3 will be dropped Figure 147 VLAN mapping example Service Provider Network MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 2 Enabling VLAN Mapping Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Mapping in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 148 VLAN Mapping KE D D T VLAN Mapping Configure Active r Port Active O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 m 5 O 6 O 7 m 8 O 9 E 10 n 11 m 12 O Apply Cancel The
233. ed Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static MAC Forwarding addresses for a port These static MAC addresses do not age out Static This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast Multicast MAC addresses for port s These static multicast MAC addresses do not Forwarding age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP Storm Control Protocol MSTP to prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to a screen where you can configure bandwidth limits Control on the Switch Broadcast This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Authentication Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link This link takes you to screens where you can logically aggregate physical Aggregation links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port authentication as well as MAC authentication for cl
234. ed the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance 38 8 1 1 ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 123 Filename Conventions INTERNA EXTERNA DESCRIPTION FILE TYPE LNAME LNAME Configuration config cfg This is the configuration filename on the File Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch Example FTP Commands ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device
235. ed to the port Quiet period Specify the number of seconds the port remains in the HELD state and rejects further authentication requests from the connected client after a failed authentication exchange Tx period Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response before re sending an identity request to the client Supp Timeout Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response to a challenge request before sending another request Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 2 2 Guest VLAN When 802 1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports clients that do not have the correct credentials are blocked from using the port s You can configure your Switch to have one VLAN that acts as a guest VLAN If you enable the guest VLAN 102 in the example on a port 2 in the example the user A in the example that is not IEEE 802 1x capable or fails to enter the correct username and password can still access the port but traffic from the user is forwarded to the guest VLAN That is unauthenticated users can have access to limited network resources in the same guest VLAN s
236. een Table 95 VLAN Mapping Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port Type a port to be included in this rule VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets and will be translated into the VID you specified in the Translated VI D field Translated VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 into which the customer VID carried in the packets will be translated Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets or adds to the untagged packets Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This is the number of the VLAN mapping entry in the table Active This shows whether this entry is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping Table 95 VLAN Mapping Con
237. el to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information on RSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP EMTS Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 d00000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 157 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Delay second Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is t
238. emperatureEventOn 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 2 1 This trap is sent when the temperature goes above or below the normal operating range TemperatureEventClear 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 2 2 This trap is sent when the temperature returns to the normal operating range voltage VoltageEventOn 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 2 1 This trap is sent when the voltage goes above or below the normal operating range VoltageEventClear 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 2 2 This trap is sent when the voltage returns to the normal operating range reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically resets ControlledResetEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 rFPO r Oo This trap is sent when the Switch resets by an administrator through a management interface RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 0 1 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 5 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch fails to get the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 2 5 2 2 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server 370 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 126 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL O
239. en a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way e It will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard e It will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 143 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 144 Loop Guard
240. ence Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore MGS3700 12C User s Guide 279 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 83 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore 26 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are still available after a restart To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 133 DHCP Snooping Configure Active DHCP Vian D
241. ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Ba
242. ent allows you to manage multiple switches through one switch called the cluster manager See Chapter 42 on page 395 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively e Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters v3 91 AAFX 0 e Write down the password and put it in a safe place e Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch 2 1 Installation Scenarios The Switch can be placed on a desktop or rack mounted on a standard EIA rack Use the rubber feet in a desktop installation and the brackets in a rack mounted installation Note For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is
243. entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of the rule Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule VLAN This is the VLAN to which this rule is applied Promiscuous Ports This shows the port s that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 33 Private VLAN Table 111 Advanced Application gt Private VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 33 Private VLAN MGS3700 12C User s Guide Green Ethernet This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to reduce the overall power consumption of switch 34 1 Green Ethernet Overview The purpose of Green Ethernet is to reduce the overall power consumption of switch It provides three features to save power in different scenario
244. er for out of profile traffic DSCP Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Replace the IP TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 57 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mi
245. er settings and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login MGS3700 12C User s Guide password and configure SNMP and remote management Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 4 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Diagnostic This link takes you to a screen where you can view system logs and test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to screens where you can configure clustering Management management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Configure This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port Clone to other ports 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display t
246. er to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC Address This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column MGS3700 12C User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards e IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol e IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol e IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 13 1 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Sp
247. er to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 14 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN Administrative Control PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process VLAN Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames ona port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member 9 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer
248. erlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 209 on page 398 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 42 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web MGS3700 12C User s Guide 397 Chapter 42 Cluster Management configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 209 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ZyXEL Status O Logou Basic Setting 27244 33 2 Member I Advanced Application Routing Protocol Basic Setting Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Management System Info VLAN Static Route Setup General Setup Static MAC Forward MAC Table Switch Setup Spanning Tree Protoc
249. es the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 171 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows An example traffic policy is to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network DICE z aba on pU AA SFE NEM Figure 171 DiffServ Network N n P Platinum G Gold B S Silver B Bronze 36 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either
250. especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Desktop Installation Procedure 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Set the Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet MGS3700 12C User s Guide 31 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet CEA Note Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack The Switch can be mounted on an EIA standard size 19 inch rack or in a wiring closet with other equipment Follow the steps below to mount your Switch on a standard EIA rack using a rack mounting kit 2 3 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements e Two mounting brackets e Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver e Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 3 1 1 Precautions e Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equi
251. estination or source MAC address will be changed In this case set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP address to make sure port trunking can work properly Select src mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s source MAC address Select dst mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address Select src dst mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses Select src ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s source IP address Select dst ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination IP address Select src dst ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Note When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security settings for a port you cannot include the port in an active trunk group Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 5 Link Aggregation Control Pr
252. ets destined to the CPU Drops BW This field shows the number of packets exceeded bandwidth Exceede d TrTcM This field shows the number of packets destined to Two Rate Three Color Drops Marker Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcas This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted t Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and Packet broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcas This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received t Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chap
253. etting Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Table 76 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 76 Supported VSAs Vendor Data or Vendor ID Vendor Type Vendor Data FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Vendor ID 890 Assignment Vendor Type 3 shell priv lvlzN 9 CISCO 1 CISCO AVPAIR shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from 0 to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 25 2 4 1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure
254. ew Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 26 1 1 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations e The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK e The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings e The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings e The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 26 1 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindi
255. f logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender Mac This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet MGS3700 12C User s Guide 287 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 89 ARP Inspection Log Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 26 7 on page 288 Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet
256. f the requests The Switch can add the following information e Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes e System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 37 on page 349 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 37 on page 349 26 1 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch 1 Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch 2 Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 271 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 3 26 1 2 26 1 2 1 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second Configure static bindings ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 129 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the s
257. figuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets Translated VID This is the VLAN ID that replaces the customer VLAN ID in the tagged packets Priority This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch 29 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview Layer 2 protocol tunneling L2PT is used on the service provider s edge devices L2PT allows edge switches 1 and 2 in the following figure to tunnel layer 2 STP Spanning Tree Protocol CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol and VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets between customer switches A B and C in the following figure connected through the service provider s network The edge switch encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before sending them across the service provider s network to other edge switches Figure 150 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario oc in Service Provider s C Network um 6 D m pussESssSS CDP EN VIP B m In the following example if you enable L2PT for STP you can have switches A B C an
258. fined VLAN s MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Note You must configure a VLAN first Figure 44 Basic Setting gt IP Setup IP Setup Domain Name Server foo 0 0 Default Management in band C Out of band In band Management IP C DHCP Client Address Static IP Address IP Address 9216811 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway foo VID fi Out of band Management IP IP Address fiszi6801 nent IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway pooo Apply Cancel In band IP Addresses IP Address booo IP Subnet Mask nono VID Default Gateway oon Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its Server corresponding IP address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the Switch is to Management send packets originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the
259. following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 VLAN Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable VLAN mapping on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN mapping feature on this port Clear this check box to disable the VLAN mapping feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 3 Configuring VLAN Mapping Click the VLAN Mapping Configure link in the VLAN Mapping screen to display the screen as shown Use this screen to enable and edit the VLAN mapping rule s Figure 149 VLAN Mapping Configuration Active Name Port VID Translated VID Priority Index Active VLAN Mapping Configure VLAN Mapping Name Port VID Translated VID Priority Delete The following table describes the labels in this scr
260. fy MGS3700 12C User s Guide 311 Chapter 31 Error Diable 31 3 The Error Disable Screen Use this screen to configure error disable related settings Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 156 Advanced Application gt Errdisable Errdisable d CPU protection Click here Errdisable Detect Click here Errdisable Recovery Click here 31 4 CPU Protection Configuration Use this screen to limit the maximum number of ARP BPDU and or IGMP packets that the Switch can receive or transmit per second on a port Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Note After you configure this screen make sure you also enable error detection for the specific control packets in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect screen Figure 157 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection CPU protection J Errdisable Reason ARP_ M Port Rate Limit pkt s 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 312 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 31 Error Diable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason Select which type of packets that you want to configure
261. g table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector LABEL DESCRIPTION Collector Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector Address UDP Port Enter a UDP port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector If you change the port here make sure you change it on the collector too The default port is 6343 Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of this entry Collector This field displays IP address of the sFlow collector Address UDP Port This field displays port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Error Diable This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port and set the Switch to take an action such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets on a port when th
262. ge 148 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 5 on page 150 for more information on MSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 77 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Bridge ID Hello Time second Max
263. gin configuring this screen afresh 32 6 PPPoE IA for VLAN Use this screen to set whether the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on a VLAN and whether the Switch appends the Circuit ID and or Remote ID to PPPoE discovery packets from a specific VLAN Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN to display the screen as shown Figure 164 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN VLAN Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No 7 m Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below MGS3700 12C User s Guide 325 Chapter 32 PPPoE Table 110 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs X
264. group MGS3700 12C User s Guide 187 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 188 Table 44 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk src mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source MAC address dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address src dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses src ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source IP address dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination IP address src dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays e Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group e LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section
265. gt Access Control gt Logins screen User Use this section to configure users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this section to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide 375 Chapter 39 Access Control 376 Table 131 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption Level for SNMP communication from this user Choose e noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level e auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user e priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authenticati on Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally
266. guring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide 113 Chapter 8 Basic Setting MGS3700 12C User s Guide PART III Advanced VLAN 117 Static MAC Forward Setup 137 Static Multicast Forward Setup 141 Filtering 145 Spanning Tree Protocol 147 Bandwidth Control 169 Broadcast Storm Control 173 Mirroring 175 Link Aggregation 185 Port Authentication 195 Port Security 205 Classifier 211 Policy Rule 219 Queuing Method 227 VLAN Stacking 231 Multicast 239 AAA 255 IP Source Guard 269 Loop Guard 295 VLAN Mapping 299 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 303 sFlow 307 Error Diable 311 PPPoE 317 Private VLAN 327 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and con
267. h Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster Candidate members List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members
268. he Switch monitor traffic in a network and send information to an sFlow collector for analysis 30 1 sFlow Overview sFlow RFC 3176 is a standard technology for monitoring switched networks An sFlow agent embedded on a switch or router gets sample data and packet statistics from traffic forwarded through its ports The sFlow agent then creates sFlow data and sends it to an sFlow collector The sFlow collector is a server that collects and analyzes sFlow datagram An sFlow datagram includes packet header input and output interface sampling process parameters and forwarding information sFlow minimizes impact on CPU load of the Switch as it analyzes sample data only sFlow can continuously monitor network traffic and create reports for network performance analysis and troubleshooting For example you can use it to know which IP address or which type of traffic caused network congestion Figure 153 sFlow Application sFlow Agent p lt N MJ N sFlow Collector MGS3700 12C User s Guide 307 Chapter 30 sFlow 30 2 sFlow Configuration Click Advanced Application gt sFlow in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 154 Advanced Application gt sFlow Active sflow Collector Port Active DAM Ch amp Wim ox 10 11 12 ECE CEO EIE CE DIE CIE CECE GECE CG Apply Cancel Collector Address 2768 2768 2768 2768 2768 2758 2768 2768 2758 2758 2768
269. he Switch to communicate with management stations not reachable via the default gateway Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management IP Multicast With IP multicast the Switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody In addition the Switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware by untagging removing the VLAN tags IP multicast packets STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol M R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other M R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network Loop Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 47 Product Specifications Table 148 Firmware Specifications
270. he next screen Figure 19 Change Administrator Login Password Logins Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm rs NENNEN NNENMNMM M M sy ANNE EE es NM SESS DERNIERE CNIIEEENIENUNEN MEAM ae EM EMEN Apply Cancel 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off m MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disable
271. he root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information on MRSTP Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Iree Protoco Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age
272. his field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 83 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Successful This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings transfers from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping databas
273. his limit MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 91 ARP Inspection Port Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Burst interval seconds The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is monitored for each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 141 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure VID CE ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Confiqure VLAN Start VID End VID Apply Enabled Log No v
274. his link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network VLAN Mapping This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN mapping settings on the Switch Layer 2 This link takes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT Layer 2 Protocol Protocol Tunneling settings on the Switch Tunneling sFlow This link takes you to screens where you can configure sFlow settings on the Switch This feature is used to monitor traffic in switched networks Errdisable This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to limit specific traffic to shut down a port because of specific reasons and activate the port automatically for preconfigured criteria PPPoE This link takes you to a screen where you can configure PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings on the Switch Private VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can block traffic between ports in a VLAN on the Switch Green Ethernet This link takes you to a screen where you can configure Green Ethernet power saving settings on the Switch IP Application Static Routing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure Two Rate Three Color Mark
275. hods Port Authentication Overview Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication e EEE 802 1x2 An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user e MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 25 1 2 on page 256 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings Note If you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then
276. hows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets SPVID This is the service provider s VLAN ID that adds to the packets from the subscribers Priority This is the service provider s priority level in the packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide 24 1 24 1 1 24 1 2 Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses i
277. i essonuiatenaddrcas cata See iu tapa tacta dunes gunna dU Fa Du Sasi au I aE duc du add 86 6 6 2 Oiealinga Private VLAMN Pula ioi sce e nensi pert ute ree e o praese ep as 89 Part il Basic Configuration Me P 91 Chapter 7 System Status and Port Stato S i i ea aaea aa veces aa adari aaiae Eaa 93 HuEe 7 N E eA ERE ARAN 93 POM OU MII MR Emm 94 pica Satie Port Detalls Acc 96 Chapter 8 Basie SIMMO ce csiecissice ccsccccaacicescnacesnectencaiannanscsei dnanmumsiasiensaneinatchusanaiaasiendauesaeceasassaveanaenasiemsarieasa 99 NEBC ID NETT TITRE eO N 99 Br muss ION a per fe udi ueui rrr ed tre terete fet bem d RR Fe piu be uda De 100 SISTA Aer uro e eS 102 PM iia Nerei YLANG m eee 104 nr Macc s M 105 ea owt SSU SeN kana A ene 106 EBIP SOND uea EE aS reer se 108 8 6 1 Management IF AGSSS OR 108 PEM ola iter 2 decus Menten Teer ina eu cc TT meme ee rere Cerone mene tery bere Er ER Rte Tees 112 Part Ws ACOVANGEG P 7 115 Chapter 9 5 1 RTI DM 117 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLAMS ioiscecesdeisseevisebb be ida bac dde eren anis ne se Diese inna TI 93 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames i e retener intonuit 118 9 2 Automate VLAN Registration EE 118 CRAEEI I LG se aaa A tocar daa maw eotetpmeninae oo oeuacee ome 118 choc Aem 118 38s PST LAN TRIBEIBEE usitatis tu eate addas ped dap bn rRdadE F
278. ibes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 57 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General Egress Type the number of an outgoing port Port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or Profile remark the DSCP numb
279. ick Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 123 for example in the Name field and enter 123 in the VLAN Group ID field Select Fixed to configure ports 2 3 4 and 5 to be permanent members of this VLAN Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending frames out of these ports Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off D Static aD VLAN Status ACTIVE v Name VLAN 123 VLAN Group ID 123 Address Learning Port Control Tagging a Normal v Tx Tagging 1 Normal Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 2 Normal 2 Forbidden Tx Tagging 3 Normal Forbidden Tx Tagging Normal D Forbidden F Tx Tagging 5 Normal Forbidden Tx Tagging 6 Normal Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 7 Normal xed Forbidden Y Ix Tagoj 9 Normal D Fixed Forbidden y Tx Tagging 10 Normal Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 11 9 Normal Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 12 Normal Fixed Forbidden V Tx Tagging a Cancel Clear MGS3700 12C User s Guide 87 Chapter 6 Tutorials 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen VLAN Status VLAN Port Setting Stati
280. identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup Table 22 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding continued LABEL DESCR
281. ients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to screens where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 4 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Queuing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with Method associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN stacking which helps to distinguish multiple customers VLANs Multicast This link takes you to screens where you can configure various multicast features IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication authorization and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of Guard unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard T
282. if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM lt 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed 8 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and
283. igation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 174 IP Application gt DiffServ uu olor Marker Active Made 9 color blind color aware Port Active Commit Rate Commit Burst Peak Rate Peak Burst T L Kbps bits Kbps Kbits 1 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 2 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 3 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 4 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 5 1 Kbps 0 bits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 6 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 7 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 8 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 9 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 1 Kbps 0 Kbits 0 10 1 Khns f Khite 11 Khns fl Khite N The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 114 P Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are d
284. iguration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Delay second Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This i
285. indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products MGS3700 12C User s Guide 437 Appendix B Legal Inform
286. ink State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKBi s RxKB s Up Time IP Application 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 _ Management 3 Down QR Disabled g 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down S j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down alie 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down OF DTESTUTE y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 rd Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 5589 12719 0 0 0 0 0 2 38 11 12 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 15091 7547 0 40 296 3 765 2 38 11 An y Clear Counter C Pot Copyright 1985 2508 b ZyXEL Communications Corp 39 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control later Click Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control to view the screen as shown Figure 202 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control Service Access Control Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Console 30 Minutes Telnet y 23 5 Minutes SSH 22 FTP y 21 5 Minutes HTTP 7 80 30 Minutes HTTPS y 443 ICMP SNMP
287. inkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 25 This trap is sent when the 2 2 Ethernet link is up linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 25 2 1 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down MGS3700 12C User s Guide 371 Chapter 39 Access Control Table 127 SNMP InterfaceTraps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION autonegotiati on AutonegotiationFailedEve ntOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 25 2 1 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface AutonegotiationFailedEve ntClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 25 2 2 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface IIdp LLDPRemoteTopologyCha nge 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 This trap is sent when the LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol remote topology changes transceiver ddmi transceiverddmiEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 This trap is sent when one of the device operating parameters such as transceiver temperature laser bias current transmitted optical power received optical power and transceiver supply voltage is above or below a factory set normal range transceiverddmiEventCle 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 This trap is sent when all a
288. instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide 167 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance MGS3700 12C User s Guide Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 14 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 14 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink ban
289. ion gt Errdisable gt CPU Protection select ARP as the reason enter 100 as the rate limit packets per second for the first entry port to apply the setting to all ports Then click Apply Errdisable a CPU nrotaction Port 7 Rate Limit pkt s 0 oo 0 0 4 won e Si2i8 ofofo Apply Cancel Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect select Active for cause ARP and inactive port as the mode Then click Apply inactive port Errdisable Detect Errdisable Cause Active Mode i inactive port BPDU O inactive port IGMP O inactive pot f Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery select Active and Timer Status for loopguard and ARP entries Also enter 180 180 seconds 3 minutes in the Interval field for both entries Then click Apply Active Reason loopguard ARP BPDU IGMP ICMP Errdisable Recovery Timer Status Errdisable Interval 300 300 300 Apply Cancel 6 5 How to Set Up a Guest VLAN All ports on the Switch are in VLAN 1 by default Say you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication on ports 1 to 8 Clients that connect to these ports should provide the correct user name and password in order to access the ports You want to assign clients that connect to ports 1 2 or
290. ion gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared If you specify 0 for the timeout value then this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 8 5 on page 106 Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cance
291. ion gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 93 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication 4 OLDE meio 802 1x Click here MAC Authentication Click here MGS3700 12C User s Guide 197 Chapter 18 Port Authentication 18 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x C 802 1x J Port Authentication Guest Vlan Active O E Quiet period Tx period Supp Timeout Port Active Max Req Reauth Reauth period secs ae aoe cee D Luii lem J old Lud Lau 1 m R On 3600 so so Bo 2 r BR o lom heo fo o o 3 r ko leg e ho fo 0 5 D2 omm Be0o oo 0 6 NN RN ong esoo ho o o 7 r BR lem feo o ho b 8 O BR lom heo fo fo o 9 D RB Ong peo o ho o 10 O BR lem feo o ho ho T H E on E poo ko po w 2 r p on Bo b Bp RB Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced Application Port Authentication 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port
292. iority 233 selective Q in Q 237 TPID 233 Tunnel TPID 233 VLAN tag format 233 VLAN tag format 233 VLAN Trunking Protocol see VTP VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN 129 VSA 264 VT100 36 VTP 306 W warranty 437 note 437 web configurator 47 getting help 55 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 447 Index home 48 login 47 logout 55 navigation panel 49 weight queuing 228 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 228 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 228 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 364 448 MGS3700 12C User s Guide
293. ircuit ID sub option The variable options include sp sv pv and spv which indicate combinations of slot port slot VLAN port VLAN and slot port VLAN respectively The Switch enters a zero into the PADI and PADR packets for the slot value delimiter Select a delimiter to separate the identifier string slot ID port number and or VLAN ID from each other You can use a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 5 PPPoE IA Per Port Use this screen to specify whether individual ports are trusted or untrusted ports and have the Switch add extra information to PPPoE discovery packets from PPPoE clients on a per port basis MGS3700 12C User s Guide 321 Chapter 32 PPPoE Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE packets if you enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch and there are no trusted ports Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port to display the screen as shown Figure 162 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port Nr Port N Cc n de w N eo 1
294. is available at www zyxel com Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Guide Forum Quick start guide Education Center CLI Reference Guide IEEE 802 11n Standard Support note ZyXEL Windows 7 Support Certification End User License Agreement Declaration SNMP MIB File Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products e Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact_us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office e Product model and serial number e Warranty Information e Date that
295. is means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address i Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Prefix A subnet mask can be represented in a 32 bit notation For example the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 can be represented as 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 and counting up the number of ones in this case results in 24 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 213 Chapter 20 Classifier Table 52 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Refer to Table 56 on page 216 for more information Destinatio n IP Address Address Prefix Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Refer to Tabl
296. is screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 41 Syslog 41 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to view the screen as shown next Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers Figure 206 Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup e Syslog Server Setup Syslog Setup Active O Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level Add Cancel Clear index Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 139 Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear
297. itch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard MGS3700 12C User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 27 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 142 Loop Guard vs STP 1 Li Li LI 1 r i Loop Guard P mum mmm MM Mmmm DM mm m um mm o m 5 a Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable Wh
298. ith Identifier String and Variables If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a VLAN on a specific port or for a specific port the Switch adds the user defined identifier string and variables into the Agent Circuit ID Sub option The variables can be the slot ID of the PPPoE client the port number of the PPPoE client and or the VLAN ID on the PPPoE packet The identifier string slot ID port number and VLAN ID are separated from each other by a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space An Agent Circuit ID Sub option example is Switch 07 0123 and indicates the PPPoE packets come from a PPPoE client which is connected to the Switch s port 7 and belong to VLAN 123 Table 105 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Using Identifier String and Variables SubOpt Length Value Identifier delimiter Slot ID delimiter String 53 byte MGS3700 12C User s Guide delimiter VLAN ID 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes Chapter 32 PPPoE 32 2 1 2 WT 101 Default Circuit ID Syntax If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a specific VLAN on a port or for a specific port and disable the flexible Circuit ID syntax in the PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent screen the Switch automatically generates a Circuit ID string according to the default Circuit ID syntax which is defined in the DSL Forum Working Text WT 101 The default access node
299. ive name for identification purposes Start Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted Address decimal notation Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 239 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 239 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group Address MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 71 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the tabl
300. ixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal v Add Cancel Clear VLAN Status Tagging v TxTagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging V Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M TxTagging V Tx Tagging v TxTagging Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 2 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 23 Ini
301. ket loss priority red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 4 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 116 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE O 7 18 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 347 Chapter 36 Differentiated Services 36 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 176 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting ojo z e 1 16 2 v 24 3 7 32 4 40 5 v 48 6 7 se v 1 0 ep 17 2 F 253 7 33 4 41 5 gt 49 B v 7 ODES aD DSCP to 802 1p Mapping afo 10 1 18 2 ae 3 afar 42 5 z so 6 v se v 3
302. l ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Select color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services Table 115 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch X Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to activate TRTCM on the port Commit Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port Rate Peak Rate Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on the color they are marked via TRTCM green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium pac
303. l ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Auto Power Select this check box to enable Auto Power Down on this port Down Auto Power Down Auto Power Down is designed to save power when the port is link down It disables almost all functions of PHY in link down state Recovery from this mode to normal mode without frames lost Clear this check box to disable the Auto Power Down feature on the port 332 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 34 Green Ethernet LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide 333 Chapter 34 Green Ethernet MGS3700 12C User s Guide PART IV IP Application Static Route 337 Differentiated Services 341 DHCP 349 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 35 1 Static Routing Overview The Switch usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the Switch send data to devices not reachable through the
304. l to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 18 MGS3700 12C User s Guide a Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 19 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security 19 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 98 Advanced Application gt Port Security e ulum m VLAN MAC Address Limit IMAC Freeze Port List MAC freeze Port Security Active Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Alarm Threshold 1 y 0 2 y 3 y 4 y 0 5 y 0 6 y 0 7 y 0 8 y 0 9 y 0 10 y 11 y 0 12 Y 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5
305. lassification for RMirror VLAN forwarding e Learning SHOULD be disabled on VLAN e For other supplier switch device it MUST support 802 1q for basis function on RMirror If user wants to have fully support on RMirror condition 2 and 3 should be considered Designation switch e The RMirror VLAN traffic must pass through connected port e In order to mirror control packets it SHOULD support classification for RMirror VLAN forwarding e Learning SHOULD be disabled on VLAN e For other supplier switch device it MUST support 802 1q for basis function on RMirror If user wants to have fully support on RMirror condition 2 and 3 should be considered 16 2 2 RMirror Configuration Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror on the up right of the navigation panel to display the RMirror screen Use this screen to active RMirror and set its VLAN ID MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror RMirror J Mirroring Source Destination Connected Port Active v Rmirror VLAN ID 200 Apply J Cancel VLAN Active Delete Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Enable RMirror RMirror VLAN ID Enter a RMirror VLAN ID to create a RMirror VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time
306. le if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive na
307. link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 31 Error Diable 31 6 Error Disable Recovery Configuration Use this screen to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 159 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery Errdisable Recovery g Errdisable Active Reason Timer Status Interval loopguard 300 ARP 300 BPDU 300 IGMP 300 ICMP 300 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 101 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the error disable recovery function on the Switch Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you configure Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them Timer Status Select this to allow the Switch t
308. me Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to a
309. me for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 114 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Add Clear Profile Name Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule Default O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile
310. n 31 hardware monitor 101 hardware overview 35 hello time 164 hops 164 HTTPS 381 certificates 381 implementation 381 public keys private keys 381 HTTPS example 382 humidity 419 IEEE 802 1p priority 107 IEEE 802 1x activate 198 202 259 reauthentication 199 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 195 IGMP version 239 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 239 IGMP filtering 239 profile 246 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index profiles 241 IGMP leave timeout fast 243 mormal 242 IGMP snooping 240 and VLANs 240 MVR 247 setup 244 IGMP throttling 243 ingress port 135 ingress rate and bandwidth control 170 installation desktop 31 precautions 32 rack mounting 32 transceivers 38 installation scenarios 31 introduction 25 IP capability 424 services 424 IP address 110 IP interface 108 IP setup 108 IP source guard 269 ARP inspection 269 272 DHCP snooping 269 270 static bindings 269 IP subnet mask 110 isolated port 327 L L2PT 303 access port 304 CDP 303 configuration 305 encapsulation 303 LACP 303 MAC address 303 mode 304 overview 303 PAgP 303 point to point 303 STP 303 tunnel port 304 UDLD 303 VTP 303 LACP 185 306 system priority 192 timeout 192 layer 2 features 423 Layer 2 protocol tunneling see L2PT layer 3 features 424 LEDs 43 ALM 44 BPS 43 PWR 44 SYS 44 limit MAC address learning 207 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 185 link aggregation 185 dynamic 185 ID information 186 set
311. n belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 9 on page 117 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 4 1 Smart Isolation To block traffic between two specific ports within the Switch you can use port isolation or private VLAN see Chapter 33 on page 327 for more information However it does not work across multiple switches For example broadcast traffic from isolated ports on a switch say B can be forwarded to all ports on other switches A and C including the isolated ports Isolated ports AN Root port 7 Designated port 8 lt lt
312. n entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 37 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 182 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs atm attt E DHCP 192 168 1 100 E DHCP 172 23 10 100 Tj For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 183 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example BERET oD VID Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information VID Type Relay Add Cancel Clear Status E I Option 82 I MGS 3712D DHCP Status Delete 192 168 1 100 DH Delete Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP MGS3700 12C User s Guide PART V Management Maintenance 359 Access Control 367 Diagnostic 389 Syslog 391 Cluster Management 395 MAC Table 403 ARP Table 407 Configure Clone 409 357 Maintena
313. n the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 1 3 24 1 4 IGMP Snooping A Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch IGMP Snoo
314. n the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 35 Tutorial Click the VLAN Port Setting Link c OREINEN VLAN Port Setting VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID Elapsed Time Statu 1 1 3 51 15 Stati 2 102 0 00 12 Stati Static YLAN IS t t 9 Enter 102 in the PVID field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 36 Tutorial Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2 ERTED Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation gt rj n All rj 1 ho nmn All m 3 m hooo n All rn 4 hoo n All m o 5 rj hn Fr All m r 6 hn r All m m 7 if n All m o 8 o i 1 n All m m 9 f nm All m 10 nmn All O P LI Hus o aa o a up ce Cancel 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 6 2 3 Configuring DHCP Relay Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent information such as the VLAN ID to DHCP requests 1 Click IP Application gt DHC
315. n the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case a DSL port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 116 MVR Multicast Television Example i VLAN 1 b a T 1 Se ii 5 PW I ijs 24 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast Multicast Setting MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Note Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 117 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR c OL aD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active D Nam
316. nce This chapter explains how to configure the screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 38 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management screen gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following Figure 184 Management gt Maintenance Current Configuration 1 Firmwar Backup C Load Fac Save Co ED Maintenance Restore C Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 e Upgrade Click Here onfiguration Click Here onfiguration Click Here tory Default Click Here nfiguration Config 1 Config 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 122 Management gt Maintenance Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Backup Configuration Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Load Factory Default Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance 38 2 Table 122 Management gt Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to
317. nd 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 54 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 9 9 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Figure 55 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Protocol Based VLAN Vian Port Setting Active Oo Port Name GP x Ethernet type others Hex VID RR Priority 0 v Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this p
318. nd End VID fields and click Apply Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the bottom section of the screen If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system name you can also select the Option82 and Information fields in the entry See Section 26 1 1 3 on page 271 Figure 30 Tutorial Enable DHCP Snooping on this VLAN DH nooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID rao End Vip 100 Apply VID Enabled Option82 Information No O O 100 E O Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 8 Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently 9 Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer as DHCP client to either port 6 or 7 The computer should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server If you put the DHCP server on port 6 or 7 the computer will not able to get an IP address 10 To check if DHCP snooping works go to Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard you should see an IP assignment with the type dhcp snooping as shown Figure 31 Tutorial Check the Binding If DHCP Snooping Works IP Source Guard J Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection You can also telnet or log into the Switch s console Use the command show dhcp snooping binding to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next
319. nd add the same outer VLAN tag to them even they have different customer VLAN IDs MGS3700 12C User s Guide 235 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Click Port based QinQ in the Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 109 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ x Port 10 11 12 D d QINQ VLAN Stacking SPVID Priority Inner Tag Priority o v untrust v 1 0 untrust v 1 0 x untrust v 1 0 v untrust v 1 0v untrust v 1 0 v untrust v 1 0 untrust 1 0 untrust v 1 0v untrust v 1 0 v untrust v 1 EA untrust v 1 0 x untrust v 1 0 v untrust v Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking Port based QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from 0 to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest
320. nd to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 37 on page 349 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 135 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure ED DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Option82 Information No C C Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed Option82 Select this to have the
321. net Y eee eee ee eS Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID EJ MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 180 DHCP Relay Configuration Example DHCP Relay Status Active v Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 1100 Remote DHCP Server 2 ooo Remote DHCP Server 3 ooo Relay Agent Information v Option 82 Information C IMGS 3712D Apply Cancel 37 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays Note You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 8 6 on page 108 for information on how to set up management IP addresses for VLANs Figure 181 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN ORNETTE Status VID Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information I MGS 3712D Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete Delete Cancel MGS3700 12C User
322. net Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation VID Type the VLAN group identification number Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Add Click Add to insert the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule IP Address This field displays the IP address IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway Delete Check the management IP addresses that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkboxes in the Delete column MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 45 Basic Setting gt Port Setup
323. nformation Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information on MRSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP Spanning MU Tree Protocol MRSTP Tree 1 7 Bridge ree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Root Our Bridge Bridge ID Hello Time second Max Age second Forwarding Delay second Cost to Bridge Port ID Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change 8000 001349000002 2 20 15 0 0x0000 0 00 00 8000 001349000002 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Conf
324. ng features e One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network e A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree e Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region 13 1 5 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 66 STP RSTP Network Example With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 67 MSTP Network Example 13 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by
325. ngs from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts 270 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 128 DHCP Snooping Database File Format initial checksum TYPE DHCP SNOOPING VERSION 1 BEGIN lt binding 1 gt checksum 1 lt binding 2 gt checksum 1 2 lt binding n gt checksum 1 2 n END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored 26 1 1 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source o
326. ni GBIC slot LNK ACT Per Management port 10 100 Operating Environment Temperature 09 C 709 C 329 F 158 F Humidity 5 90 non condensing MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 47 Product Specifications Table 147 Hardware Specifications Storage Environment Temperature 209C 70 C 49F 158 F Humidity 5 90 non condensing Ground Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Power Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Fuse Specification 250 VAC T2A External Signal Jack Supports input from four external alarms or other devices and output to one device External Signal connector e Input connect any one of the input pin pairs 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 to a normally open NO dry contact device without any external input power An alarm is triggered when the circuit is closed e Output dry contact support 20 VDC 500mA only connect the output pin pair 3 25 to a device in Normal Close NO operation and or pin pair 2 3 to a device in Normal Open NO operation Standard Wire Gauge 20 28 AWG Wire strip length 6 7 mm Table 148 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address In band 192 168 1 1 Out of band Management port 192 168 0 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User admin Name Default Password 1234 Number of Login Accounts Configurable on the Switch 4 m
327. nnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port to have the Switch add the Tunnel TPID tag to all outgoing frames sent on this port In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it Tunnel TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates TPID whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0000 to FFFF that the Switch adds in the outer VLAN tag of the frames sent on the tunnel port s The Switch also uses this to check if the received frames are double tagged The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802 1Q If the Switch needs to communicate with other vendors devices they should use the same TPID Note You can define up to four different tunnel TPIDs including 8100 in this screen at a time Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 4 1 Port based Q in Q Port based Q in Q lets the Switch treat all frames received on the same port as the same VLAN flows a
328. o wait for the specified time interval to activate a port or allow specific packets on a port after the problem was gone Deselect this option to turn off this rule Interval Enter the number of seconds from 30 to 2592000 for the time interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide 315 Chapter 31 Error Diable MGS3700 12C User s Guide PPPoE This chapter describes how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client 32 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview A PPPoE Intermediate Agent PPPoE IA is deployed between a PPPoE server and PPPoE clients It helps the PPPoE server identify and authenticate clients by adding subscriber line specific information to PPPoE discovery packets from clients on a per port or per port per VLAN basis before forwarding them to the PPPoE server l PPPoE Server PPPoE Client PPPoE IA 32 2 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization and P
329. ocol RSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree capability 2 configurable trees IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol QoS IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues per port Port based egress traffic shaping Rule based traffic mirroring Supports IGMP snooping VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 4K static maximum Supports GVRP for dynamic registration Double tagging for VLAN stacking Private VLAN for port isolation Protocol Based VLAN IP subnet based VLAN VLAN mapping Smart Isolation Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Six groups up to 8 ports each Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Support port mirroring per IP TCP UDP Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64 Kb increments Provider Bridge BPDU transparency Layer2 protocol tunneling MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 47 Product Specifications Table 149 Feature Specifications continued Layer 3 Features IP Capability IPV4 IPv6 support 64 IPV4 IPV6 Management IPs Wire speed IP forwarding Routing Static Routing protocols IP services DHCP DHCPv6 client DHCP DHCPv6 relay VLAN based DHCP relay DHCP snooping Multicast IGMP snooping IGMP v1 v2 v3 16 VLAN maximum user configurable IGMP filtering MVR IGMP timer Multicast reserve group Static multicast IGMP snoo
330. ol ARP Table Maintenance IP Setup Bandwidth Control Port Status Diagnostic Port Setup Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Cluster Management LLinksAoarpaailon MAC Tgffile Port Authentication Port Security Access Control DiffServ Queuing Method 42 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 210 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 User 192 168 0 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp ls 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W WwW w 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config W W w 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 rw rw rw l owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 390BBA0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management The follo
331. ol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Sync Interval Enter the time interval time and the switch will sync with timeserver Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date Enter the new date in year month and day format The new
332. olation 135 port mirroring 175 176 423 direction 176 egress 176 ingress 176 port redundancy 186 port security 205 limit MAC address learning 207 MAC address learning 205 overview 205 setup 206 297 305 port setup 112 port status 94 port VLAN ID see PVID 126 port VLAN trunking 119 port based VLAN 132 port isolation 135 settings wizard 135 ports diagnostics 390 mirroring 175 speed duplex 113 tandby 186 power AC 101 BPS 101 voltage 101 power connector 39 power consumption 419 power module current rating 40 power wire 40 power source mode 100 power specification 419 power status 101 power wires 40 PPPoE IA 72 trusted ports 319 untrusted ports 319 PPPoE Intermediate Agent 317 tag format 317 priority level 107 priority queue assignment 107 private VLAN 327 application example 327 configuration 328 isolated port 327 overview 327 promiscuous port 327 product registration 437 promiscuous port 327 protocol based VLAN 129 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 129 application example 129 configuration example 132 isolate traffic 129 priority 131 un tagged packets 129 PVID 118 PVID Priority Frame 118 PWRLED 44 all connected 135 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index Q QoS 423 and classifier 211 Queue weight 230 queue weight 228 queuing 227 SPQ 228 WRR 228 Queuing algorithm 230 Queuing method 230 queuing method 227 R rack mounting 32 RADIUS 255 256 advantages 256 and port authentication 256 and
333. on MGMT port and 192 168 0 1 through the MGMT port in the Location or Address field Press ENTER MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin case sensitive and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 17 Web Configurator Login Connect to 192 168 1 1 The server 192 168 1 1 at MGS 3712D at Thu Jan 1 00 35 05 1970 requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name v Password C Remember my password 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Web Configurator Layout The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 18 The Web Configurator Layout amp Save Status Logout H Help Por Status g Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 R i 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 Y 1 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled i i 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled i i 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled d Al 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled F D i 0 00
334. on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port Figure 134 DHCP Snooping Port Configure DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps c VLLL c ntrusted ntrusted b ntrusted v b ntrusted b ntrusted v b ntrusted v b ntrusted b ntrusted v b ntrusted b ntrusted b ntrusted Dp ntrusted v b ntrusted v b Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Sel
335. one configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide 345 Chapter 36 Differentiated Services 36 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Note You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time Figure 175 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker cO 0 0 7 0 0c 600 i125 i Mie au olor Marker Diffserv Active O amp color blind Mode Port Active Commit Rate Peak Rate wed green yellow red O Kbps Kops Vv f Kbps f Kbps lo p p O f Kbps Kbps n o p O f Kbps f Kbps o n p O f Kbps f Kbps fo o p O f Kbps f Kbps o lo p m fi Kbps fi Kbps o o o C fi Kbps fi Kbps fo on o O fi Kbps fi Kbps o fo o O fi Kbps f Kbps o o p O fi Kbps Kbps fo fo n O fi Kbps Kbps o lo n O fi Kbps Kbps fo lo n C color aware Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 115 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switch The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individua
336. one configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 89 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting In this screen activate trunking group T1 select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done Figure 90 Trunking Example Configuration Screen ik Aggregation Setting Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria Cr sredstmac f T2 src dst mac T3 src dst mac n sre dot mac Il T5 src dst mac T6 src dst mac 0 0 0 0 0 Port Group Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete you do not need to go to any additional screens MGS3700 12C User s Guide 18 1 18 1 1 Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication met
337. or more details MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent I nformation can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 119 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings gt General Setup 37 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 178 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global Xue Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 booo Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 ooo Relay Agent Information O Option 82 Information 1 IMGS 3712D Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide 36
338. ority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type I P VLAN 4 Select the protocol Leave the default value I P 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 6 Leave the priority set to O and click Add Figure 56 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example ORE Vlan Port Setti Active Ca Port 1 Name P VLAN IP m Ethernet type Others Hex VID Priority Oly index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN 1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 2 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add 3 Click Add 9 11 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port 132 MGS37
339. ormation on Connected Port Figure 85 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Connected Port Connected Port J RMirror Rmirror VLAN 500 v Port Connected Port 1 3 v 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Apply Cancel VLAN Connected Port n io io 3 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Mirroring gt RMirror gt Connected Port LABEL DESCRIPTION RMirror VLAN Select a RMirror VLAN ID that you configured in the RMirror screen from the drop down list box Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Connected Port Select this option to set a connected port This port s is used for switch es connection by RMirror VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displa
340. ort Acto Max Req Reauth Reauth period Tx period Supp Timeout secs secs secs secs oO On 1 v 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 2 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 3 v 2 On v 3600 e o i 4 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 5 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 6 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 7 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 8 v 2 On v 3600 e i 9 o 2 On 3600 e o 30 10 0 nv 30 6 5 3 Enabling Guest VLAN 1 Click the Guest Vlan link in the 802 1x screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Select Active and enter the guest VLAN ID 200 in this example on ports 1 2 and 3 The Switch puts unauthenticated clients in the specified guest VLAN Set Host mode to Multi Secure to have the Switch authenticate each client that connects to one of these ports and specify the maximum number of clients that the Switch will authenticate on each of these port 5 in this example Click Apply OIE iD 802 1x Port Active Guest Vian Host mode Multi Secure Num Li Multi Host 1 M Multi Secure 5 2 M Multi Secure 5 3 v Multi Secure 5 4 Fl 1 Multi Host 1 5 O 1 Multi Host 1 6 o 1 Multi Host 1 7 F 1 Multi Host 1 8 o 1 Multi Host 1 9 Li 1 Multi Host 1 oO Bano ee LM o eae CP ee ned ed 1 3 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently Clients that attach to port 1 2 or 3 and fail to authen
341. ot access the device To access the Switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN Out of band Management IP Address IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 0 1 If you change this IP address make sure the computer connected to this management port is in the same subnet before accessing the Switch Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION In band IP Addresses You can create up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s You must configure a VLAN first IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below IP Sub
342. otocol Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 17 2 on page 185 for more information on dynamic link aggregation Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Setting Active E System Priority 65535 Group ID LACP Active T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 D DBEBEEBEBREEDI Port LACP Timeout 0 v seconds il 0 v seconds Zj seconds to JE e Zj seconds 0 v seconds Nike win ills 0 v seconds XQ secon M uL Lu c dl ass 7 1 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable Aggregation an Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 46 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with Priority the lowest system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the
343. over or straight ports so crossover cables can connect both computers and switches hubs 3 1 3 Mini GBIC Slots These are slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form factor Pluggable SFP Transceiver Multisource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 8074i specification Rev 1 0 for details You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic or even copper cable connectors To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors e Type SFP connection interface e Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down 2 Pressthe transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly 4 Close the transceiver s latch latch styles vary 5 Connect the fiber optic cables to the transceiver Figure9 Transceiver Installation E
344. ovider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 23 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to MGS3700 12C User s Guide pur Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Figure 107 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 23 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only e Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching e Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking exampl
345. own See Section 24 1 on page 239 for more information on multicasting Figure 112 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting c ONUIECEEETSSGTDNHHN D Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Unknown Multicast VLAN Active Querier F IGMP Snooping Host Timeout 260 802 1p Priority No Change IGMP Filtering Active Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding Drop Reserved Multicast Group 9 Flooding Drop Port immed eem e eA neve Group MaxGroup Throttling IGMP Filtering IGMP Querier Unknown Leave Limited Num Profile Mode Multicast 9 Deny v Default v Auto Y Flooding Y 1 4000 200 0 Deny v Default w Auto Y Flooding 2 9 4000 200 0 Deny x Default Auto Y Flooding Y 3 4000 200 0 Deny v Defaut v Auto v Flooding v 4 4000 200 0 Deny v Default Auto Y Flooding Y 5 4000 200 0 Deny v Defaut v Auto v Flooding v 6 4000 200 a 0 Deny v Default Auto Y Flooding Y 7 4000 200 0 Deny v Default v Auto Flooding v 8 4000 200 r 0 Deny v Defaut v Auto v Flooding 9 4000 200 a 0 Deny v Default v Auto Flooding Y 10 4000 200 0 Deny v Default Auto
346. ping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 24 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 24 1 on page 239 for more information on multicasting Figure 111 Advanced Application gt Multicast ONSUGDECDGEIRUUD Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Advanced Application Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as sh
347. ping fast leave IGMP snooping statistics IGMP throttling MLD Snooping proxy IGMP message Limit AAA Support RADIUS and TACACS MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 47 Product Specifications Table 149 Feature Specifications continued Security Static MAC address filtering Static MAC address forwarding MAC Freeze IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Limiting number of dynamic MAC addresses per port SSH v1 v2 SSL Intrusion Lock Multiple RADIUS servers Multiple TACACS servers 802 1X VLAN and bandwidth assignment IP source guard Static IP MAC binding DHCP snooping ARP Inspection MAC authentication Guest VLAN The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 150 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 1981 Path MTU Discovery for IPv6 RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
348. pment it contains e Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 32 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 3 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section MGS3700 12C User s Guide 33 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 3 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Figure 7 Mounting the Switch on a Rack if que pb ooo ooo Q Q 0 DO D OD O OD nnonooo Q Q Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of th
349. power adaptor to the Switch 2 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 46 Troubleshooting 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 3 3 on page 43 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide and Section 46 1 on page 415 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Disconnect and re connect the power cord to the Switch 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor 46 2 Switch Access and Login forgot the IP address for the Switch 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Usethe console port to log in to the Switch 3 Use the MGMT port to log in to the Switch the default IP address of the MGMT port is 192 168 0 1 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 53 forgot the username and or password 1 The default username is admin and the default password is 1234 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 53 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 46 Troubleshooting e The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 e If you changed the IP address use the new IP address e If
350. pply _ Intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE access nowede circuit id Active identifier string option sp m delimiter E Click Port on the top of the screen 2 Select Trusted for ports 11 and 12 and then click Apply xr VLAN Intermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrusted s Poo d 1 Untrusted E __ nnn 2 Untrustea d ud 3 Untrusted ae pool 4 Untrusted il pd 5 Untrusted E n aint 6 Untrusted s E 7 Untrusted Eas EEE 8 Untrusted eee d 9 Untrusted __ __ 10 11 Trusted 12 Trusted E Poo DELL Apply Cancel Then Click I ntermediate Agent on the top of the screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 The Intermediate Agent screen appears Click VLAN on the top of the screen c ONDCHSITIEECYESTU Port C VLAN 2 PPPoE Active v access node identifier MGS3700 12C circuit id Active identifier string option spv z delimiter v Apply Cancel 4 Enter 1 for both Start VI D and End VID Click Apply Num Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID 1 End vip 1 Apply 5 Then select Yes to enable PPPoE IA in VLAN 1 and also select Circuit id and Remote id to allow the Switch to add these two strings to frames tagged with VLAN 1 and pass to the PPPoE server Click Apply
351. pply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide 1 73 Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control 174 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays the port number E Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port pkt s receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MGS3700 12C User s Guide a a Mirroring This chapter
352. r 2 2 device operating parameters return to the normal operating range Table 128 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authentication authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEven tOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 25 2 1 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password RADIUSNotReachableEve ntOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 25 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS server RADIUSNotReachableEve ntClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 25 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS server can be reached 372 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 128 AAA Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION accounting chableEventOn RADIUSAccountingNotRea 25 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS accounting server RADIUSAccountingNotRea 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 This trap is sent when the chableEventClear 25 2 2 RADIUS accounting server can be reached Table 129 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6
353. r 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 level6 jez level5 5z level4 jaz level3 Bz level2 fix level joz level 2 z Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 102 for example in the Name field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Figure 34 Tutorial Create a Static VLAN ximus D ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Address Learning VLAN Status S Port Control Tagging Norma v 7 Tx Tagging 1 Norma Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 2 2 Norma Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 3 Norma Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 2 Norma Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 8 9 Norma gt Fixed Forbidden 7 Tx Tagging 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 10 Norma Fixed Forbidden 4 Tx Tagging 11 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 12 9 Norma Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging Add Cancel Clear 8 Click the VLAN Status link i
354. r interval Tc to conform Burst with the target rate CIR per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MGS3700 12C User s Guide 171 Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control 172 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 15 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 79 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control OL EXE a Active O Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s l m ee s A sum 2 ob ob op of obit ob rp Oo r p 5 rp orch PEL cb rb AT ELA gt a aia a ae A
355. r of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 7 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch Figure 40 Status gt Port Details Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collision Error Packet Distribution Potberas Port NO Name Link Status LACP TxPkts RxPkts TxBytes RxBytes Errors HOL Drops BW Exceeded TrTcM Drops Tx KBs s Rx KBs s Up Time TX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Tagged RX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Control Single Multiple Excessive Late RX CRC Length Runt 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant Port Status Down STOP Disabled J a Pe
356. r s Guide Chapter 43 MAC Table The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 144 Management gt MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Select one of the buttons and click Search to only display the data which matches the criteria you specified Select All to display any entry in the MAC table of the Switch Select Static to display the MAC entries manually configured on the Switch Select MAC and enter a MAC address in the field provided to display a specified MAC entry Select VID and enter a VLAN ID in the field provided to display the MAC entries belonging to the specified VLAN Select Port and enter a port number in the field provided to display the MAC addresses which are forwarded on the specified port Sort by Define how the Switch displays and arranges the data in the summary table below Select MAC to display and arrange the data according to MAC address Select VID to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Select PORT to display and arrange the data according to port number Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into static entries They also display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into MA
357. r to the following figure MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server Figure 197 HTTPS Implementation WS HTTPS HTTP Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 39 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 39 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 198 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer xi Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s securily certificate
358. ration Example eese 352 27 4 Conmoonng DAOP VLAN SEMOS se nesunaikinta a Koa ranana aa 353 37 4 1 Example DHCP Relay Tor TWO VLANS i e endi te tecto rene sen tt beeeeints 354 Pari V iu ql 357 Chapter 38 n A 359 251 The Malnienabbe SOFBPE sakreas iradas pO RERO RR bo UD cob UR MORD 359 LA CTA DIS ania dti Dd p Ince add id ebidprt emma d Eae im Edad dpi Read aen 360 30S CNE Ptr e E 360 254 Mebuot SUBIT uoce agn pad api d te REOR RR DIR S adr Deb nota Dad D Pb adr 361 cmd scu amp issn o eec ES 361 386 Mesto a GonfigdretloA FUE iudico ease tics inei r a er RR eR ePi ca ae 362 comte dr pese ti ETE m m m bias 363 DE PTP CBIIBSHO LIB aie uiridi es aiU E tree er ree irat UU rrrre Peeper crete ded Ru Medo Lacu Tre te 363 20 T Fanams CODD qoactosiuendastiadpenitistoa idR eed eie cn d Load 353 30 8 2 FTP Command Lie PIOODUUNQ iouuaeoduniikesicu epa oa c omen dais Fontana i fca dudo 364 390 20 ase FTP CIEMS Mete 365 COO d INTE PERITO quuecssiiipeonen adeunda n addu d eee 365 Chapter 39 Doro e M oe 367 291 PROSE CGN CIMINO Ac e arane 367 29 2 The Access Control Main SOFBBET uiuis erro deci Ra a RR etc ER race pna o i pad 367 xp deum eer tovc HS 368 28 9 SNMP VS And SECUN siriani iuei aE rds E pene inte bus cde A 369 ag d SUB
359. re 99 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit VLAN Active Port VID Limit Number Alarm Threshold Add Port Security Index Add Cancel Clear Active Port VID Limit Number Alarm Threshold Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Advanced Application Port Security VLAN MAC Address Limit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to activate this rule Port Enter the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID Enter the VLAN identification number Limit Number Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port in a specified VLAN For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Alarm Alarm threshold of learned MAC address by VLAN Threshold Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring
360. riables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 125 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPvi when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 39 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the
361. riority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to m
362. rotocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet Type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the pri
363. rror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile action Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule
364. rt number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring 16 2 16 2 1 RMirror RMirror lets you redirect data flows that you monitor on a source switch to a different destination switch which allows a centralized network analyzer or probe to capture packets for an entire LAN Because traffic flows are not directly copied to monitor port but reflected on a designed RMirror VLAN RMirror make distance remote source switch possible that port mirroring traffic can be monitored by different switches supported RMirror feature RMirror Overview RMirror feature supported e Remote mirroring of ingress and egres
365. rt number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 24 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide 251 Chapter 24 Multicast Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 118 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration Multicast VLAN ID OFT mc NND VR E Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from VLAN ID the drop down list box Name Enter a descript
366. ry when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 9 1 on page 117 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 51 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting c OMELET Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP r Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation I np far m r 1 O fi r all x O r 2 Dp ff r 5 s z r 3 Oo fi n all E r 5 O fi r Au O r 6 C fi O all x r E 7 O fi O Au r r 8 Oo fi r Au m E 9 r fi r1 Au O r 10 O fi O All 0 r 11 O fi O All E r 12 rH fi r Au O r Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this
367. s The three features are EEE Auto Power Down and Short Reach Auto Power Down is designed to save power when the port is link down It disables almost all functions of PHY in link down state Recovery from this mode to normal mode without frames lost Enables Auto Power down function it turns off the power to the Ethernet PHY when either no cable is connected or the Ethernet port at the other end is down The PHY remains capable of detecting energy on the port and resuming normal activity when an active device is connected to the port When all cables are disconnected from the switch it is placed in a sleep mode further saving power while still remaining capable of detecting energy on any port and resuming normal activity in a timely manner MGS3700 12C User s Guide 331 Chapter 34 Green Ethernet 34 2 Configuring Green Ethernet Click Advanced Application gt Green Ethernet in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 167 Advanced Application gt Green Ethernet GreenEthernet Auto Power Down y Port Auto Power Down C Qi amp 6 hm oO c5 74 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 112 Advanced Application gt Green Ethernet LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Power Select this option to enable Auto Power Down on the Switch Down Port This field displays a port number t Use this row to make the setting the same for al
368. s static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 130 IP Source Guard OMA eee Static Binding DHCP Snooping Arp Inspection Index Mac Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 1 a1 12 12 12 12 01 172 23 37 222 inifinity static 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 IP Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding Mac Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 26 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection
369. s E UU m T 227 VLAN SICUT ast arid dad Pos EE pO OD Per eae ee Eee 231 PPO T a Em 239 EU hd e EEA T OET Mec E SEEEN EE Le Erst ctim ty cela AE IEE ENE A A EE E T 255 IP Goure GUIO EE EI TT 269 Loop GN oai N 295 VLAN MADDI m A E A 299 Layer 2 Protocol ONGINI eea E A dur sa EEEE ENSE 303 xc Hee cM 307 ipsa NI RM 311 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 9 Contents Overview zi RR TU Tm S17 41 0 E E A E AE pe E corer tr ec renter A 327 Eco mbi Re E 331 IP ApplicatiOn sesicissscstasenisadsidatacssacessacssretinianssiiaineiassevdaseesasdasseiadialusiebenlaransiasdbiasaninesinbasenniss 335 ruant e 337 inner a Ht SEO arusini aang bbc abc ocn Cadre ibl taa tupra Ca b ra Red 341 Rigid m n T EU 349 Bee AUTUMN M D 357 uc procis eec D EN ES 359 PS GOL ida teet bea e pK detebn bebe Le bb teal obti Ka atlas bete Qi LA Mid 367 wur em cU TR 389 coi e N 391 SNTCISEITEIS IR DECIDE ANAA NAS 395 MAC Pi ee E PE 403 ARP TADIG A 407 TE C TRIES sary Ssh sachin asia causes hOctl pta QU Ga udis wt NS Gada realy nd B D 409 Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications eee 413 Hore Me MEE n 415 FOI SC CATION acc ca dante vef beo ab Epbe din Son ld nbus Lilo n rop d tue bes VL BuEbGOT NO URL EDU DE 419 Appendices and INGO 12s sikiza
370. s Guide 353 Chapter 37 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 121 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply Remote DHCP Server 1 3 Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Relay Agent Information Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays the DHCP mode Relay DHCP Status For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuratio
371. s Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 25 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS IP Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time 25 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 78 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y Y NAS Identifier Y Y Y NAS IP Address Y Y Y Service Type Y Y Y Acct Status Type Y Y Y Acct Delay Time Y Y Y Acct Session Id Y Y Y Acct Authentic Y Y Y Acct Session Time Y Y Acct Terminate Cause Y
372. s check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters VLAN Group Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and ID 4094 Address Enable Disable MAC learning per VLAN learning Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memo
373. s in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to enable the guest VLAN feature on this port Clients that fail authentication are placed in the guest VLAN and can receive limited services Guest Vlan Enter the number that identifies the Guest VLAN Make sure this is a VLAN recognized in your network Host mode Specify how the Switch authenticates users when more than one user connect to the port using a hub Select Multi Host to authenticate only the first user that connects to this port If the first user enters the correct credential any other users are allowed to access the port without authentication If the first user fails to enter the correct credential they are all put in the guest VLAN Once the first user who did authentication logs out or disconnects from the port rest of the users are blocked until a user does the authentication process again Select Multi Secure to authenticate each user that connects to this port Multi Secure If you set Host mode to Multi Secure specify the maximum number Num of users between 1 and 5 that the Switch will authenticate on this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel
374. s size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 103 IP addresses At the time of writing the Switch supports the following features e Static address assignment and stateless auto configuration e Neighbor Discovery Protocol a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices in a network e Remote Management using ping SNMP telnet HTTP and FTP services e ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform diagnostic functions such as ping e IPv4 IPv6 dual stack the Switch can run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time e DHCPv6 client and relay e Multicast Listener Discovery MLD snooping and proxy For more information on IPv6 refer to the CLI Reference Guide 1 3 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a Supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 47 e Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the web configurator and in some cases are necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 38 8 on page 363 e SNMP The Switch can be monitored by an SNMP manager See Section 39 3 on page 368 e Cluster Management Cluster Managem
375. s the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 5 on page 150 for more information on MSTP Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protoco Status Bridge Active O Hello Time 2 seconds MAX Age 20 seconds Forwarding Delay 15 seconds Maximum hops 128 Configuration Name 0019cbO000002 Revision Number Apply Cancel Instance Instance Bridge Priority 32768 j VLAN Range start End Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN S H Port Active Priority Path Cost 1 n ha NN 2 O 128 4 3 O 128 a 4 O 128 a 5 O 128 a Ada Cancel Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 1 4094 Delete Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 77 on page 166 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this checkbox to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the
376. s traffic e Control packets mirrored e Two types of source switch for different requirements CLI WEB and MIB interface of configuration e RMirror VLAN traffic priority setup Before you start setting RMirror VLAN you should know all the roles of switch in the network e Source switch The port traffic mirrored on RMirror VLAN e Intermediate switch Forwarding traffic from source switch to destination switch The intermediate switch can not only be our switch device other supplier switch device is suitable for use e Destination switch Monitor traffic from source switch The destination switch can not only be our switch device other supplier switch device is suitable for use MGS3700 12C User s Guide 177 Chapter 16 Mirroring Figure 81 Rmirror Architecture Intermediate switch Intermediate switch Connected port RMirror Traffic Connected port Destination switch Monitor port Reflector port Table 37 Design and Implementation Constraints CHARACTER PREREQUISITES Source switch e Hardware support RMirror feature e In order to mirror control packets it must support classification of RMirror VLAN to forwarding e RMirror with reflector port can connected to several intermediate switches and destination switches by connected port Intermediate switch e The RMirror VLAN traffic must pass through connected port e In order to mirror control packets it SHOULD support c
377. screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port This field displays the port number x Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them MGS3700 12C User s Guide 125 Chapter 9 VLAN Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID A PVID Port VLAN ID is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines Enter a number between land 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All Tag Only Frame Type and Untag Only Select
378. se wires of the correct gauge to connect either of the signal output pin pairs 1 normal close 2 common or 2 common 3 normal open on the Signal connector to the input signal pin pairs of an Signal connector on another ZyXEL Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 2 When daisy chaining further Switches ensure that the signal output pins you use are the same as those you used when connecting to the first switch as shown in the diagram below Figure 15 Daisy chaining an External Alarm Sensor to Other Switches of the Same Model cee 3 2 Rear Panel The following figures show the rear panels of the Switch The rear panel contains a connector for external backup power supply Figure 16 Rear Panel PAREN 11 10 saan C N LI LI pary e C N N ELE 111 10 3 Pin Assignments 3 3 LEDs After you connect the power to the Switch view the LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch and as an aid in troubleshooting Table 2 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATU S DESCRIPTION BPS Green On The backup power supply is connected and active Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
379. sed on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 21 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 20 2 on page 211 for more information MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Click Advanced Applications gt Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 103 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Policy Active rH Name i Classifier s General Metering Bandwidth kops Out of Profil Egress Port fi Beil VG Parameters Priority o DSCP TOS o Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority Nochange C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packet to priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Action C Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Sendthe packetto the egress port Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action I Set OutDrop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear The following table descr
380. send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session e Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select e start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session e stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The S
381. settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for Rate the incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Commit Specify the number of committed bits allowed to be sent per interval Tc to Burst conform with the target rate CIR per second 1 70 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control Table 34 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for Rate the incoming traffic flow on a port Peak Specify the maximum number of bytes of unused peak bandwidth capacity Burst that can be accumulated Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Egress Specify the number of bits allowed to be sent pe
382. sid rd alb ORE v ndr taa d 119 gA o ed X VLAN ND Ae CUN 120 ual VILAM quoslibet ep fad bored bv p baden 120 chow Erie VEAN MUI P 121 CRGA VLAN DETG er 122 CONI e OUS VLAN Suenan eerd lad ctas panna 122 954 Configure VLAN Port Settings unsesucspsteri disti rbi ddagieens ioi kevin dst d ret uA dde ea D uds asd 125 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 18 Table of Contents ae Supa Se CLANS quisbossprbeoituapiitisiepnadu A Kcd Pa capo bata aepo aU 126 9 7 Conigunng Subnet Based VLAN uiusisssnebeuiderpdxiadecduneidarksas c cud estemos aiea du 127 9 8 Protocol Based VLAINS quuicicisencicn ttes doce mmt ahi dune pter esee pL Cad epe reden E cpad pax Erant SURE 129 9 9 Ggigardng Protocol Based VILAM Lusia dd ecc Rer ia d bo RERO TER ER 130 8 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example 55 i adpt bet tes iterat S tee Radon ed pk ioeina 132 811 Pot bssed VLAN SGUD auiccueitictcdinteete ue Ete up Rt a RREpE eS RM PEDIS EOE 132 WT Congue a Port based VI 12ussissadunissoncicktexiua n anaa a qaare 134 Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Seu iis csciciscccciccicessssasccssieiaccencescasasatiainescssasisiacsneiaivevaaseverecnasienieds 137 TOT VINE 137 10 2 Configuring Statie MAG Forwarding ciae erp deer abc a ain a d eee 137 Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Selup eei enr te tette tn suan nene an bae s SMS IR sen D MEM TE 141 11 1 Statie M ltica
383. sssssssssseseeneeenn eren nnne 395 422 Ds Management SaS arisini gena ana t ercbca a rd dad narnia eS 396 42 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management sssssssssssseeeeenne enne 397 42 3 Clustering Management Configuration iaces ertet nera csde ker reesei 400 Chapter 43 ich 403 CONNU UENIT 28 7 77 arcem 403 cct i pia PE em 404 Chapter 44 Filo e 407 CUM ARP TINE OVE Mei A banana en Hee 407 AA PTPN File Wy Ga e S ET 407 424 2 Viewing hia ARP Table scriind a iaai 408 Chapter 45 C nfigure NINE 409 253 EOIN CNN ariaa tina apo duri ood ce eles aO GR a a unc rada Nd 409 Part VI Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications 413 Chapter 46 bus cq u m 415 46 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS reiner eau a o Rei inen 415 Ae with boe AD LUE osssaxeppousisitasi drip ib epoca uen dp dap atn Ceca pene 416 MGS3700 12C User s Guide 2 Table of Contents 46 3 Mh CEN SDOTE ceo dant a PAS a iota aot A ana cra rcr RR RM 418 Chapter 47 dut eds iul o0 T 419 47 1 Fan Module Removal ano Installation aisciccscunuteesvemetecedvunpkt eecstenn beesuddastk eedud ignc es eu vanae tes 427 Part VII Appendices and Index
384. ssword default 1234 2 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN and create a VLAN with ID of 100 Add ports 5 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown Deselect Tx Tagging because you don t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag Click Add Figure 26 Tutorial Create a VLAN and Add Ports to It c stacviAN VLAN Status ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Iv IVLAN 100 100 Port Control Tagging Normal gt Iv Tx Tagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden V Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTauding 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden V Tx Tagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 5 C Normal Fixed Forbidden TxTagging 6 C Normal Fixed Forbidden I Tx Tagging 7 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 8 Normal j Forbidden v Taggi ee ae em oe Add Cancel Clear MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 Go to Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting and set the PVID of the ports 5 6 and 7 to 100 This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5 6 and 7 with the tag 100 Figure 27 Tutorial Tag Untagged Frames c OMELETTE Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation r r s E r r 1 O n Al m m 2 r n Al T r 3 r n Al 7 r rj 4 O
385. st Forwarding COMBINE uroiis AKENE 141 T12 Gontigurnng Statie Multicast Forwarding resnimi Ri her i Pha e et aaa tdt 142 Chapter 12 UME 145 12 Conia a Fie FUN ME 145 Chapter 13 cni ul s 147 125 SIPSESTE CO adeis RU bo Rb Mita repa EMPIRE eran d bn and 147 12 501 35 TIPP UNNI aas aa usaba datei x Sd oedkcoce datus A 147 19 1 2 HOW DIP WORS ri ariaa a en b RE U ec R Rn epa pU ERr ane 148 USSI F Pat eee axbosstbobcsdageannadanetagan Coen pd eO nU eC MOSEORT Rp ada 149 PEt RS uu dose ce esoieathiac nies edntieean eae niece ieadnreacees 149 T3 Bog uas STP ecc E 150 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status SOeghi usui rianda bote iaaa Ene ana ieee 153 125 2 Spam Tree Config ROI duussesescxditesattteriQdapte tuos u priua actu e ER Ere o qunEs 154 13 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 1i tent rer nra 155 19 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol SIRE atncsdetecepnd ciens aeria cards samedi 187 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol sssssesseee 159 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status esses 161 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol ssseseeeeeeeeenennnnnn nnns 163 19 9 Multiple Spamming Tree Protocol SUMUS auessesetetccisene ete tn tpa einsa 166 Chapter 14 t liil j
386. switches to the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application 1 1 2 Bridging Example In this example application the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the Switch Moreover the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 1 3 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The Switch can provide the same band
387. t VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in
388. t VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 48 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Change Pages D VLAN Status g VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 2 04 58 Static Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Search Enter an existing VLAN ID number s separated by a comma and click by VID Search to display only the specified VLAN s in the list below Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch The Number This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch of VLAN The Number _ This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display of Search in the list below Results a This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or
389. t address 141 static multicast forwarding 141 static route overview 337 static routes 339 static trunking example 192 Static VLAN 122 static VLAN control 124 tagging 124 status 48 94 link aggregation 187 MSTP 166 port 94 port details 96 power 101 STP 157 161 VLAN 121 STP 147 306 423 bridge ID 158 162 bridge priority 156 160 configuration 155 159 designated bridge 148 forwarding delay 156 160 Hello BPDU 148 Hello Time 156 158 160 162 how it works 148 Max Age 156 158 160 162 path cost 148 157 161 port priority 157 161 port state 149 root port 148 status 157 161 terminology 147 vs loop guard 295 subnet based VLAN 128 and DHCP VLAN 128 priority 128 setup 127 subnet based VLANs 126 switch lockout 53 switch reset 53 switch setup 106 switching 423 syntax conventions 5 SYS LED 44 syslog 273 391 protocol 391 server setup 393 settings 392 setup 392 severity levels 391 system information 100 system log 390 system reboot 361 T TACACS 255 256 setup 259 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 255 Tag Protocol Identifier see TPID tagged VLAN 117 temperature 419 temperature indicator 101 terminal emulation 36 time current 103 time zone 103 Time RFC 868 103 time server 103 time service protocol 103 format 103 TPID 233 trademarks 435 transceiver Multisource Agreement MSA 37 transceivers 37 installation 38 removal 38 traps AC prefer 371 destination 375
390. tains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits MGS3700 12C User s Guide 11 7 Chapter 9 VLAN 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 80
391. tea E d el 1 Untrustea E 2 Untrusted E d LLL 3 Untrusted E NENNEN _ 4 5 sec isis 004349000000 6 7 Untrusted NENNEN 0 0 LLL 8 Untrusted a d 9 Untrusted __ 10 Untrusted s NENNEN Ld 11 Untrusted Apply Cancel Then Click I ntermediate Agent on the top of the screen The I ntermediate Agent screen appears Click VLAN on the top of the screen identifier string option delimiter OEMS Port VLAN PPPo Active v access node identifier MGS3700 12C circuit id Active Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Enter 1 for both Start VID and End VID since both the Switch and PPPoE server are in VLAN 1 in this example Click Apply OWE Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID ft End VID i Apply 5 Then select Yes to enable PPPoE IA in VLAN 1 and also select Circuit id and Remote id to allow the Switch to add these two strings to frames tagged with VLAN 1 and pass to the PPPoE server Click Apply CT VLAN Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Statvip Endvio sd Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No E O n E Apply Cancel 6 3 2 Configuring Switch B The example uses another MGS 3712D as switch B MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 1 Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Select Active then click A
392. ter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 8 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Control This field shows the number of control packets received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessiv e This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64
393. thout deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Port This field displays the port s within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 12 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source and or destination MAC addresses and VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Filtering Na cnnrE Active i Name O Discard source Discard destination MAC LCE E RE RE RE P Action VID Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 12 Filtering The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 24
394. tial Setup Network Example Port VID Milo NS dec QC apron 74 aa EES v VLAN 1 N VLAN2 i i H i 1 1 1 H 1 1 1 H E n E SEA SE 1 r S SEA 1 i LI LI tm Uu n m mumm 1 Click Advanced Applications c OMELET Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status gt VLAN in the navigation panel vre D Then click the VLAN Port H 1 Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation Setting link po DT DO A M e 1 o 2 r All r r 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field for CUP a eee al F F 3 Oo 1 r All bd r fal port 1 and click Apply to save 4 n p T n Al r r your changes back to the run oe a z 7 6 r 1 r All b r r time memory Settings in the 7 r f roo A z r r run time memory are lost when T mmm D o E z y 9 n 1 r All T r r the Switch s power is turned off 10 r f n Al r r 11 n 1 r All x m n 12 E 1 r All x r al Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address The default management IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes The following figure shows an example Figure 24 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address EE det E w v VLAN2
395. ticate with the RADIUS server now should be in VLAN 200 and can access the Internet but cannot communicate with devices in VLAN 1 6 6 How to Do Port Isolation in a VLAN You want to prevent communications between specific ports in a VLAN but still allow them to access the Internet or network resources in the same VLAN You use MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Private VLAN to do port isolation in a VLAN instead of assigning each port toa separate VLAN and creating a different IP routing domain for each individual port Internet gt C v5 _ In this example you put ports 2 to 5 in VLAN 123 and create a private VLAN rule for VLAN 123 to block traffic between ports 2 3 and 4 6 6 1 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 3 4 and 5 as a member of VLAN 123 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory C switch setup 80210 C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active VLAN Type P MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer pon milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 gt level jez levels s level4 4 gt level3 3 z level2 EE level joz level 2 Apply Cancel 3 Cl
396. tile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 32 PPPoE 32 5 1 PPPoE IA Per Port Per VLAN Use this screen to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN to display the screen as shown Figure 163 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN KD Port Show Port Port Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply Port 0 VID Circuit id Remote id The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 109 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Enter a port number to show the PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings for the specified VLAN s on the port Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below Port This field displays the port number specified above VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are
397. ting color and evaluation against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 172 TRTCM Color blind Mode MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services 36 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color aware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing packet loss priority TRTCM can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR Figure 173 TRTCM Color aware Mode 36 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the nav
398. tion the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100 1000M for Gigabit connections MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this Duplex port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the re
399. tion Status screen displays by default See Section 17 1 on page 185 for more information Figure 86 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status Group ID T1 T2 T3 T4 TS T6 ED Link Aggregation Statu S g Enabled Synchronized Ports Ports 3 6 7 Aggregator ID 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Link Aggregation Setting Criteria src dst mac src dst ip src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac Status LACP Static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen Ports to be in the trunk group The port number s displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging to this group Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link Ports in this trunk group Aggregator Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC ID address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 17 2 1 on page 186 for more information on this field The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled for this
400. to 20 alphanumeric characters to identify the PPPoE intermediate identifier agent Hyphens and spaces are also allowed The default is the Switch s host name circuit id Use this section to configure the Circuit ID field in the PADI and PADR packets The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port or for a specific VLAN ona port has priority over this The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port screen or for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has priority over this That means if you also want to configure PPPoE IA Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN setting leave the fields here empty and configure circuit id and remote id in the Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN screen Active Select this if you want the Switch to add the user defined identifier string and variables specified in the option field to PADI and PADR packets from PPPoE clients If you leave this option unselected and do not configure any Circuit ID string using CLI commands on the Switch the Switch will use the string specified in the access node identifier field identifier Specify a string that the Switch adds in the Agent Circuit ID sub option string You can enter up to 53 ASCII characters Spaces are allowed option Select the variables that you want the Switch to generate and add in the Agent C
401. to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication 18 2 3 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication EOLIE Port Authentication Active rH Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout p Port Active O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 O 7 0 8 O g r1 10 r 11 E 12 m Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS server Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 18 Table 49 Advanced Applicat
402. to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 41 Syslog MGS3700 12C User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 42 1 Cluster Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 140 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster 24 members Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management
403. twork Example Region 3 Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol OEE Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Ka Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration Spanning Tree Mode Spanning Tree Configuration Status Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Rapid
404. ty gt Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 49 O 2 0 0 0 0 49 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 49 O 2 0 0 0 0 49 O Apply Cancel MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a re
405. uch as the Internet The MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication rights granted to the Guest VLAN depends on how the network administrator configures switches or routers with the guest network feature Figure 95 Guest VLAN Example VLAN 102 __ Ne Xess sess S53 Internet Use this screen to enable and assign a Guest VLAN to a port In the Port Authentication gt 802 1x screen click Guest Vlan to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 96 Advanced Application Port Authentication 802 1x Guest VLAN XCTSAunm 802 1x Port Active Host mode Multi Secure Num Multi Host Multi Host E Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Wuli Host iw Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Mult Host Multi Host Multi Host Apply Cancel p 0 0 0 amp i wih as a O TET a OOT b N MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays a port number i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Change
406. uide Chapter 35 Static Route Table 113 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an Address immediate neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 35 Static Route MGS3700 12C User s Guide 36 1 36 1 1 Differentiated Services This chapter describes how Differentiated Services DiffServ fits into a quality of service strategy and shows you how to configure Two Rate Three Color Marker traffic policing on the Switch DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are gi
407. up Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 10 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 10 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 19 on page 205 for more information on port security MGS3700 12C User s Guide 1 37 Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC Forwarding g Active C Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for
408. up 189 191 status 187 traffic distribution algorithm 188 traffic distribution type 190 trunk group 185 lockout 53 log 390 login 47 password 52 login account Administrator 378 non administrator 378 login accounts 378 configuring via web configurator 378 multiple 378 number of 378 login password 379 loop guard 295 examples 296 port shut down 297 setup 297 vs STP 295 MAC Media Access Control 100 MAC address 100 407 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Index maximum number per port 207 208 MAC address learning 107 127 130 137 207 specify limit 207 MAC authentication 195 aging time 203 example 196 setup 202 MAC filter and ARP inspection 272 MAC freeze 206 MAC table 403 display criteria 405 how it works 403 sorting criteria 405 transfer type 405 viewing 404 maintanence configuration backup 363 firmware 361 restoring configuration 362 maintenance 359 current configuration 321 322 324 325 359 main screen 321 322 324 325 359 Management Information Base MIB 368 management port 39 135 default IP address 39 managing the device good habits 29 using FTP See FTP 29 using Telnet See command interface 29 using the command interface See command interface 29 man in the middle attacks 272 max age 164 hops 164 MDIX Media Dependent Interface Crossover 37 MGMT port 39 MIB and SNMP 368 supported MIBs 369 MIB Management Information Base 368 mirroring ports 175 monitor port
409. v Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 134 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 39 10 Remote Management Click Management Access Control Remote Management to view the screen as shown next MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control You can specif
410. ve Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management Table 143 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afres
411. ve link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the I GMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 24 1 4 on page 240 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 113 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN amp IGMP Snooping VLAN Mode auto C fixed Apply Cancel VLAN Name VID Add Cancel Clear Index Name VID Delete Cancel Multicast Setting Delete MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to three VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For examp
412. ven the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 170 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services 36 1 2 The DSCP value determin
413. version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Information Trap Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with Community each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Destination Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in Management
414. view an online help description of that screen MGS3700 12C User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator MGS3700 12C User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup e Create a VLAN e Set port VLAN ID e Configure the Switch IP management address 5 1 1 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN N _ e Internet nar eee eee sees eee MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 1 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static Example 2 VLAN link NIEXEIUNNP VLAN Port Setting VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 Static Change Pages Previous Next 2 Inthe Static VLAN screen OE select ACTI VE enter a ACTIVE 2 descriptive name in the Name piis E VLAN Group ID field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 Port Control network 1 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden TxTagging C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C F
415. was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 26 7 2 on page 292 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 26 7 ARP Inspection Configure 288 Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 139 ARP Inspection Configure e OF Inspection Configure Port VLAN ARP Inspection Active E Filter Aging Time Filter aging time 300 seconds Log Profile Log buffer size 32 entries Syslog rate 5 entries Log interval 1 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and spe
416. weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Hybrid SPQ This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Lowest Queue Select a queue QO to Q7 to have the Switch use SPQ to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using SPQ Select None to always use WFQ or WRR Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 23 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking also known as Q in Q to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service pr
417. width as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application m tm 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 9 on page 117 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example 1 2 IPv6 Support IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP addres
418. wing table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 142 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 390BBAO bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management 42 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration to display the next screen Figure 211 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration Clustering Manager Active Name VID Clustering Candidate List Index oNemcnraEREC rcnt Status 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 Password Iv Master f Apply Cancel Add Cancel Refresh MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 143 Management Cluster Management Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Acti
419. witch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication e Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to e Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following e Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 e Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify e Vendor data A value you want to assign to the s
420. work servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution MGS3700 12C User s Guide Appendix A Common Services MGS3700 12C User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of
421. xample Sar Figure 10 Connecting the Fiber Optic Cables TERES RAN HNP lo tal 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Remove the fiber optic cables from the transceiver 2 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 11 Removing the Fiber Optic Cables ENSE i Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example Figure 13 Transceiver Removal Example 3 1 4 Management Port The MGMT management port is used for local management Connect directly to this port using an Ethernet cable You can configure the Switch via Telnet or the web configurator The default IP address of the management port is 192 168 0 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 3 1 5 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel and that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans Use the following procedures to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it Note Check the power supply requirements in Chapter 47 on page 419 and make sure you are using an appropriate power source Keep the power supply switch and the Switch s power switch in the OFF position until you come to the procedure for turning on the power MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3
422. y a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen Figure 208 Management Access Control Remote Management Entry Active 1 Vv 2 5 3 O 4 D Start Address End Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS booo 1 oo e WM MW NW NW NM NM looo amp w oo o o o on n on m oon booo p o o n Oo O loo oo p o o oO D n mn c OLETTAEN Secured Client Setup Access Control Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 135 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management End Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can Address manage this Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the
423. y to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning ERAS ERRADAS Em Tee EARS ARS H GERI ETA TExs TETSIRLT PHEGEA EE EASE Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have
424. y use the embedded web configurator or command line interface to configure the Switch If you re using the web configurator you need Internet Explorer 5 5 and later or Netscape Navigator 6 and later MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview You can access the command line interface using a terminal emulation program on a computer connected to the Switch console port see Section 3 1 1 on page 36 or access the Switch using Telnet The next part of this guide discusses configuring the Switch using the web configurator MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview MGS3700 12C User s Guide The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScript enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login Start your web browser Type http and the IP address of the Switch the default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 through an in band n
425. you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Switch 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 3 3 on page 43 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Switch skip this step 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Switch with the default IP address See Section 4 6 on page 53 6 If the problem continues contact the vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Try to access the Switch using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Switch check the remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Switch 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or telnet If you have configured a secured client IP ad
426. you may need to install 802 1x client MGS3700 12C User s Guide software Chapter 18 Port Authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port Figure 91 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process I T New Connection Login Info Request Login Credentials Oo Authentication Request 88 Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials The login credentials are based on the source MAC address of the MGS3700 12C User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 92 MAC Authentication Process N ij amp aw Q New Connection i Authentication Request A E E P Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the Auth and Acct gt Radius Server Setup screen Click Advanced Applicat
427. you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it 4 MGS3700 12C User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device MGS3700 12C Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions e TheMGS3700 12C may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font e A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard e Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen e Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024
428. ys the VLAN ID Connected Port This field displays the connected port number s MGS3700 12C User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 17 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation Note In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 17 6 on page 192 for a static port trunking example 17 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups MGS3700 12C User

ZyXEL Communications metrogigabit switch Plumbing Product User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents